Sharp DVD Recorder DV RW2U User Manual

DVD RECORDER  
MDOVDEL-RW2U  
OPERATION MANUAL  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
The region number  
for this recorder is 1  
1
IMPORTANT / IMPORTANTE  
EZ SET UP (AUTO CHANNEL /CLOCK SET UP)  
EZ SET UP (PROGRAMACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA DE CANAL/PUESTA EN HORA DEL RELOJ)  
1
Connect Antenna/Cable  
to recorder first.  
2
Then, plug into AC Power 3 Do not press the  
4
EZ SET UP complete.  
EZ SET UP completo.  
Outlet.  
POWER button until  
completion of EZ Set Up.  
En primer lugar conecte  
la antena/el cable a el  
producto.  
A continuación,  
enchúfelos al  
No pulse el botón de  
ALIMENTACIÓN  
tomacorriente de CA.  
(POWER) hasta haber  
terminado la EZ SET UP.  
Detail: Please see page 23  
Detalle: véase la página 23  
• Please read this Operation Manual carefully before using your recorder.  
• Instrucciones importantes de seguridad y guía de operación rápida en español  
Página 105  
DV_RW2U#Hyo1-4.p65  
2
03.1.15, 9:45 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions  
before you operate this product and save these  
instructions for later use.  
ANTENNA LEAD-IN WIRE  
GROUND CLAMP  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This  
product has been engineered and manufactured to assure  
your personal safety. BUT IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN  
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARDS. In  
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810–20)  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810–21)  
order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this  
ELECTRICAL  
SERVICE  
product, observe the following basic rules for its installation,  
EQUIPMENT  
use and servicing.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
1. Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
should be read before the product is operated.  
(NEC PART 250, PART H)  
NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
2. Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions  
should be retained for future reference.  
3. Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the  
15. Lightning For added protection for this product during a  
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for  
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent  
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.  
16. Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be  
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric  
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines  
or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme  
care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or  
circuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
17. Overloading Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords,  
or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of  
fire or electric shock.  
18. Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind  
into this product through openings as they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a  
fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the  
product.  
operating instructions should be adhered to.  
4. Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions  
should be followed.  
5. Cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before  
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a  
damp cloth for cleaning.  
6. Attachments Do not use attachments not recommended by  
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.  
7. Water and Moisture Do not use this product near waterfor  
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.  
8. Accessories Do not place this product on an unstable cart,  
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing  
serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the  
product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table  
recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product.  
Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturers  
instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recom-  
mended by the manufacturer.  
19. Servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself as  
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous  
voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel.  
20. Damage Requiring Service Unplug this product from the  
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel  
under the following conditions:  
9. Transportation A product and cart  
combination should be moved with care.  
Quick stops, excessive force, and  
uneven surfaces may cause the product  
and cart combination to overturn.  
10. Ventilation-Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to  
protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be  
blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by  
placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.  
This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such  
as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or  
the manufacturers instructions have been adhered to.  
11. Power Sources This product should be operated only from  
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you  
are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult  
your product dealer or local power company. For products  
intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer  
to the operating instructions.  
12. Grounding or Polarization This product is equipped with  
either a two-wire polarized plug (one plug blade bigger than the  
other) or a three-wire grounded plug (a third pin for grounding).  
The two-wire polarized plug will fit only one way into the power  
outlet. The three-wire grounded plug will fit only into a  
grounding-type power outlet.  
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the  
product.  
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d. If the product does not operate normally by following the  
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are  
covered by the operating instructions, as an improper  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and  
will often require extensive work by a qualified technician  
to restore the product to normal operation.  
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in  
performance, this indicates a need for service.  
21. Replacement Parts-When replacement parts are required,  
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics  
as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,  
electric shock, or other hazards.  
22. Safety Check-Upon completion of any service or repairs to  
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety  
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating  
condition.  
If the plug does not fit, ask your electrician to replace your  
obsolete outlet. Do not modify the plug. To do so will void the  
safety feature.  
13. Power-Cord Protection Power-supply cords should be  
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by  
items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention  
to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the product.  
23. Heat-This product should be situated away from heat sources  
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
14. Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna or  
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna  
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection  
against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810  
of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides  
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and  
supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an  
antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location  
of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes,  
and requirements for the grounding electrode. See diagram  
below.  
3
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
3
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Change the Display on the TV Screen........................... 28  
Change the Display on the Front Panel Display ............ 28  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................  
Features .......................................................  
Accessories .................................................  
3
6
6
Playback....................................................... 29  
DVD Playback ................................................................ 29  
Playback the playback-only discs............................. 29  
Selected Title Playback .................................................. 30  
Recorded DVD Disc Playback ....................................... 30  
Playback After Confirming Contents with DiscNavi .. 30  
Playback by Selecting a Title .................................... 31  
Video CD/Audio CD/CD-R/CD-RW Playback ................ 31  
Selected Track Playback ................................................ 31  
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse ........................................... 32  
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse (Search) Function on the  
About Discs .................................................  
Types of Discs that Can Be Played on This Recorder ...  
Discs that Cannot be Played..........................................  
7
7
7
About Recording .........................................  
Recording Format ..........................................................  
VR (Video Recording) Mode......................................  
Video Mode ...............................................................  
Discs and Recording Formats........................................  
DVD-RW Discs ..........................................................  
DVD-R Discs ..............................................................  
Recording Time .............................................................. 10  
Disc Remaining Time ..................................................... 10  
Cautions Regarding Recording ...................................... 10  
Using the Proper Disc .................................................... 11  
Unrecordable Material.................................................... 11  
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Recorder ............................................................... 32  
SKIP (Forward/Reverse) ................................................ 32  
Slow-Motion ................................................................... 32  
Still/Pause, Frame Advance ........................................... 33  
Skip Search .................................................................... 33  
MP3 Discs Playback.................................... 34  
To Play Another File (music title) during Playback ......... 34  
To Skip the File during Playback .................................... 34  
Initialization and Finalization ..................... 12  
Initialization (Format) ..................................................... 12  
Allowing Discs to be Played Back  
Changing Image/Audio During Playback.. 35  
Zoom Function ............................................................... 35  
Angle Function ............................................................... 35  
Audio Setting .................................................................. 36  
Monitor Output when Receiving a Stereo or SAP  
with Other DVD Players (Finalization) .................... 12  
About the Contents of the Disc ................. 12  
Title, Chapter and Tracks ............................................... 12  
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case ............................ 13  
The icons used in this Operation Manual....................... 13  
Broadcast .......................................................... 36  
DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) ...................................... 36  
Programmed Playback ............................... 37  
Title/Track Programmed Playback ................................. 37  
Chapter Programmed Playback ..................................... 38  
Precautions During Use ............................. 14  
Disc Precautions ............................................................ 14  
Proper Disc Storage .................................................. 14  
Handling Precautions ................................................ 14  
Cleaning the Pick Up Lens ........................................ 14  
Warning of Dew Formation ........................................ 14  
Copyright........................................................................ 14  
Repeat Playback.......................................... 39  
Repeat Playback ............................................................ 39  
A-B Repeat Playback ..................................................... 39  
Function Control ......................................... 40  
Direct Skip (title/chapter/track) ....................................... 41  
Direct Time Skip ............................................................. 41  
Subtitle/Angle/Audio Setting .......................................... 42  
Clearer Picture and Dynamic Sound Setting ................. 43  
DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND .................................. 43  
DIGITAL GAMMA....................................................... 43  
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE......................................... 43  
DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND/DIGITAL GAMMA/  
Major Components...................................... 15  
Operating a TV Using the Remote Control  
(Universal Remote Control) .................................... 18  
Setting the Remote Control Code .................................. 18  
Basic Conneciton........................................ 19  
Easy Connection ............................................................ 19  
Using Other Types of Video Output ............................... 20  
Connecting Using an S-Video Output ....................... 20  
Connecting Using the Component Video Output...... 20  
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE setting .................... 44  
Direct Selection of Scenes  
Selecting Scenes by Title Number ................................. 45  
Disc Menu Screen.......................................................... 45  
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections ..... 21  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (1)...... 21  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (2)...... 22  
Recording for DVD Discs  
Before Recording ........................................................... 46  
Recordable Discs ...................................................... 46  
About the Recording Format ..................................... 46  
Before Starting Recording ......................................... 46  
Initialization ................................................................ 46  
Recording Formats and Recording Modes ............... 47  
Disc Information ........................................................ 47  
Confirmation of Available Disc Space ....................... 47  
EZ Set Up ..................................................... 23  
Channel Setting........................................... 24  
Channel Setting ............................................................. 24  
Adding Channel Memory/Erasing Channel Memory ...... 24  
Clock Setting ............................................... 25  
Auto Clock Setting ......................................................... 25  
Manual Clock Setting ..................................................... 26  
Automatic Daylight Saving-Time (D.S.T.) Adjustment .... 26  
TV Program Recording ............................... 48  
Basic Recording ............................................................. 48  
Pause Recording ........................................................... 49  
Stop Recording .............................................................. 50  
Useful Recording Functions ........................................... 50  
OSD Language Setting ............................... 27  
Display Information..................................... 28  
4
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
4
03.1.15, 11:22 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
DISC LANG.................................................................... 81  
DD LEVEL(Dolby Digital Output Level) .......................... 81  
Digital OUT ................................................................ 81  
Basic Settings of the Playback Setup Screen ................ 82  
PARENTAL Level Setting ............................................... 82  
DISC LANGUAGE Setting.............................................. 84  
Simple Recording Timer ............................. 51  
Changing the Settings of the Simple Recording Timer .. 51  
Cancelling the Simple Recording Timer ......................... 51  
Timer Recording with VCR Plus+®  
System ...................................................... 53  
Language Code List for Disc Language ... 85  
Timer Recording.......................................... 54  
Record Setup Screen .................................. 86  
CHP INT. ........................................................................ 86  
EXACT REC................................................................... 86  
R REC START ............................................................... 86  
EX. AUDIO ..................................................................... 86  
D-MONO REC ............................................................... 86  
RW INIT. ......................................................................... 86  
SAP ............................................................................... 87  
Basic Settings of the Record Setup Screen ................... 87  
Disc Timer Recording ................................. 56  
Canceling the Disc Timer Recording .............................. 57  
Using the Recorder During Timer  
Standby Mode ....................................... 58  
When Finished Using the Recorder .......................... 58  
Confirming/Cancelling Timer Program ..... 59  
Automatic Recording of Satellite  
Broadcast (AV AUTO REC) ................... 60  
Connecting to a Satellite receiver, etc............................ 60  
Recording with AV AUTO REC....................................... 60  
To Cancel the AV AUTO REC Function .......................... 61  
Disc Setup Screen....................................... 88  
VR MODE INITIALIZE ................................................... 88  
VIDEO MODE INITIALIZE ............................................. 88  
FINALIZE ....................................................................... 88  
PROTECT ...................................................................... 88  
Basic Settings of the Disc Setup Screen ....................... 89  
Problems of Timer Recording .................... 62  
Blinking the TIMER Indicator.......................................... 62  
When Timer Recording Times Overlap .......................... 62  
Option Setup Screen................................... 90  
CLOCK DISP ................................................................. 90  
POWER OFF ................................................................. 90  
DUBBING ....................................................................... 90  
DV LINK ......................................................................... 90  
DV AUDIO IN ................................................................. 91  
BLUE SCREEN .............................................................. 91  
3D Y/C............................................................................ 91  
Basic Settings of the Option Setup Screen .................... 92  
Editing the Disc ........................................... 63  
Before Editing the Disc .................................................. 63  
About Editing ............................................................. 63  
Editing Procedure ...................................................... 63  
Switching between Playlist and Original Playback ... 64  
Editing an Original Title .............................. 65  
Erasing a Part from the Original ..................................... 65  
Inputting/Renaming the Title .......................................... 66  
Adding Chapter Markers ................................................ 66  
Erasing Chapter Markers ............................................... 67  
Navimark ........................................................................ 68  
Protecting the Title ......................................................... 69  
Cancelling the Protection ............................................... 70  
Connecting to Audio Equipment ............... 93  
Playing 2 channel audio with an Analog Connector ....... 93  
Playing Dolby Digital (5.1 channel)  
and DTS audio with a Digital Connection ............... 93  
Playing 2 channel audio with a Digital Connection ........ 94  
Recording by Connecting  
with a Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK ................... 95  
DV IN/OUT Terminal .................................................. 95  
Connecting Using the DV IN/OUT Terminal  
(i.LINK) .............................................................. 95  
Recording with this recorder (DV Uptake) ................ 96  
Recording with a Digital Camcorder ......................... 97  
Recording Using an Analog Connection  
Erasing a Title from the Original or Playlist 71  
Erasing All Titles ............................................................. 71  
Erasing One Title ........................................................... 71  
Making a New Playlist (PL) ......................... 72  
Making a Playlist from Original Title ............................... 72  
Adding a Part to the Playlist ........................................... 73  
Searching for Start Point and End Point Parts ............... 74  
with a Digital Camcorder ....................................... 98  
Recording with this Recorder .................................... 98  
Recording Material from External Equipment ................ 99  
Troubleshooting .......................................... 100  
Service Informatino (For the U.S.) ............. 101  
Glossary ....................................................... 102  
Specifications .............................................. 104  
ESPAÑOL (Guía de operación rápida)....... 105  
Editing a Playlist Title ................................. 75  
Erasing a Part from the Playlist...................................... 75  
Moving the Title .............................................................. 75  
Adding a Part from the Original to the Playlist ............... 76  
Adding Chapter Marker in a Playlist............................... 77  
Erasing Chapter Marker in a Playlist ......................... 78  
Renaming the Title ......................................................... 78  
Navimark ........................................................................ 78  
Tamper Proof ............................................... 79  
Tamper Proof Setting ..................................................... 79  
Disengaging Tamper Proof ........................................ 79  
Operating during Tamper Proof ................................. 79  
Playback Setup Screen............................... 80  
TV MODE ....................................................................... 80  
PROGRESSIVE ............................................................. 80  
PARENTAL ..................................................................... 81  
5
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
5
03.1.15, 9:51 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Playback Function  
Edit Function  
Powerful sound comparable to a movie theater  
Connecting this recorder to an AV amplifier compatible  
with Dolby Digital or DTS lets you enjoy powerful  
Surround sound filled with a sense of presence.  
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily  
Unlike video tape, you can jump right to the part of a DVD  
disc that you want to watch without having to fast forward  
and rewind. You can also search for the scene you want  
to watch both quickly and easily.  
Editing a recorded material without changing an  
Original  
You can edit original recordings by creating a collection  
of titles (Playlist) without actually altering the recorded  
titles (originals).  
Chapter Marker  
You can put a chapter marker anywhere in your desired  
point. This function is useful when you search the scene  
you want to watch with chapter skip function.  
Erase/Move/Add Scenes  
DiscNavi  
The DiscNavi function lets you find the title you want to  
play back at a glance for easy playback.  
You can make your desired Playlists to erase the scene,  
add the scene and move the scene.  
Lists of titles are displayed for finalized DVD-RW discs  
(discs recorded in the Video mode) and DVD-R discs.  
Compatibility  
Video mode recording that will be played back  
with other DVD players  
Recording Function  
Up to 8 programs ofTimer recording  
VCR Plus+*1  
Discs recorded in the Video mode can be played back  
with other DVD players by finalizing them after recording.  
(However, this does not guarantee that these discs can  
be played back on all DVD players.)  
*1 VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The VCR Plus+  
system is manufactured under licence from Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
Simple Recording Timer  
DiscTimer Recording  
The disc timer recording function lets you program timer  
recordings onto a disc for added convenience when  
recording regular weekly programs.  
*
Recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs using the Video  
mode (video format) employ a new standard approved  
by the DVD Forum in 2000, and compatibility with this  
standard is left to the discretion of the respective DVD  
player manufacturer. Consequently, there are some  
models of DVD players and DVD-ROM drives that are  
unable to play back DVD-R/RW discs.  
Exact Rec  
This function automatically changes the recording mode to  
prevent recordings from running out before they are finished due  
to a lack of available disc space by comparing the available disc  
space and the time required for the timer recording.  
AV AUTO REC  
Disc Features and this Operation  
Manual  
The types of functions and operations that can be  
used for a particular disc vary depending on the  
features of that disc. In some cases, these functions  
and operations may differ from the descriptions given  
in this Operation Manual. In this event, follow the  
instructions given on the screen. This Operation  
Manual only covers basic disc operations.  
Record the timer program automatically when connected  
to a satellite receiver, etc. with timer recording functions.  
Audio Input/Output  
Digital connection with a digital camcorder  
You can uptake, edit and store material from a digital camcorder  
equipped with a DV jack. In addition, you can also output  
material recorded with this recorder to a digital camcorder.  
For some operations, the  
or  
indicator may  
appear on the TV screen. This indicates that the  
operation described in this Operation Manual is not  
permitted for the current disc.  
Accessories  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
POWER  
ANGLE AUDIO  
CH  
SETUP/  
FUNCTION DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
TITLE  
MENU  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
VCR PLUS+  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
100  
ERASE PROGRAM  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREEN PLAY LIST  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
Two AAsize batteries  
(R-6, UM/SUM-3)  
Round coaxial cable  
(75 Ohm, 1 m [3-1/4 ft.])  
Remote control unit  
Video/Audio cable  
(RRMCGA056WJSA)  
for the remote control unit  
(QCNW-8388AJZZ)  
(QCNW-8387AJZZ)  
6
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
6
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Discs  
Types of Discs that Can Be  
Played on This Recorder  
The following discs can be played back and recorded  
with this recorder. Do not use an 8 cm (3") adapter (for  
CDs).  
Since this recorder is compatible with the NTSC format,  
use discs that contain the letters NTSCon the disc or  
package.  
Use discs that are compatible with standards as  
indicated by the presence of the following logo marks on  
the disc label. Playback of discs not complying with these  
standards is not guaranteed. In addition, image quality or  
sound quality is not guaranteed even if such discs are  
able to be played back.  
DVD video players and discs have region numbers,  
which dictate the regions in which a disc can be played.  
The region number for this product is 1. (Discs marked  
ALL will play in any player.)  
The specific playback functionality for some DVD discs is  
determined by the disc manufacturer. Because this  
recorder plays disc data in accordance with the disc  
manufacturers guidelines, some functions may not be  
available on some discs. Be sure to read the instructions  
provided with the disc.  
The Prohibitedindicator  
displayed on the TV  
screen during this product operation indicates that such  
manufacturer-imposed restrictions apply.  
If a menu screen or operating instructions are displayed  
during playback of a disc, follow the displayed operating  
procedure.  
I Discs For Recording and Playback  
Discs that Cannot be Played  
Recording  
Contents of  
Types of Discs  
Size of Discs  
Format  
Discs  
I The following discs are unable to be played back or  
are not played back properly on this recorder. If such  
a disc is mistakenly played back, the speakers may  
be damaged due to the large volume. Never attempt  
to play back such discs.  
DVD-RW  
Ver.1.1  
Ver.1.1  
(CPRM  
VR Mode  
Video Mode  
12cm (5"), single-  
sided/double-  
sided, single  
layer disc  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
compatible)*1  
DVD-R  
Ver.2.0  
Video Mode  
8cm (3"), single-  
sided, single  
layer disc *2  
CDG, Photo CD, CD-ROM, CD-TEXT, CD-EXTRA, SVCD,  
SACD, PD, CDV, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, +RW, DVD-Audio  
4.7  
*1 Copy-oncesatellite broadcasts and other programs  
that can be recorded only once can be recorded.  
*2 DVD-R/RW 8 cm (3") single-sided, single-layer discs can  
only be used for recording in the Video mode. Some  
discs of this type may not be able to be recorded.  
I The following DVD video discs cannot be played.  
Discs not containing 1or ALLfor the region number  
(Discs sold outside the authorized marketing area).*1  
Discs recorded on PAL or SECAM format.*2  
Discs produced illegally.  
I Discs for Playback (Playback Only)  
Discs recorded for commercial use  
*1The region number for this product is 1.  
*2This recorder is compatible with the NTSC format. Make  
sure to check the format of the disc before purchasing.  
Recording  
Contents of  
Types of Discs  
Size of Discs  
Format  
Discs  
DVD Video Region  
number  
Video format Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
ALL  
1
I The following CD-R/CD-RW discs cannot be played.  
Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be  
played back.  
Video CD  
format  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
Video CD  
Discs recorded in a format other than a Video CD/  
Audio CD and MP3 file format cannot be played back.*3  
Discs may not be able to be played back depending  
on their recording status or the status of the disc itself.  
Discs may not be able to be played back depending  
on their compatibility with this recorder.  
12cm (5")  
8cm (3")  
*3  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
format  
Audio  
Audio  
Audio CD  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
format  
CD-R/CD-RW  
Discs may not be able to be played back depending  
on the recorder used for recording.  
MP3 file  
format  
Non-finalized discs cannot be played back.  
Video CD  
format  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
*3 This recorder has been designed on the premise of  
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact  
Disc) standards. CDs containing a signal for the purpose  
of protecting copyrights (copy control signal) may not be  
able to be played back with this recorder.  
7
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
7
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Discs  
I Discs with unusual shapes cannot be played.  
Discs with unusual shapes (heart-shaped or hexagonal  
discs,etc.) cannot be used. The use of such discs will  
cause a fault.  
*3  
About MP3 file format  
MP3 files are audio data compressed in MPEG1 Audio  
layer 3 file format. MP3 fileshave .mp3as extensions.  
(Some files that have .mp3extensinos or files that have  
not been recorded in MP3 format will produce noise or  
cannot be played.)  
˝ Playing MP3 discs  
Some MP3 files are not played in the order they were  
recorded.  
The number of layers which can be recognized,  
including files and folders, is maximum of 8.  
Some multi-session discs cannot be played.  
It is recommended to record data at a lower speed as  
data recorded at fast speed can produce noise and  
may not be able to be played.  
The more folders there are, the longer the reading  
time.  
Depending on the folder tree, reading MP3 files can  
take time.  
Folder or track (file) names are limited to 8 characters.  
Folder or track (file) names that go over 8 characters  
will be abbreviated. (Certain letters or symbols in  
folder names or title name may not be displayed.)  
The playing time may not be correctly displayed  
during MP3 file playback.  
˝ The following files cannot be played on this  
recorder  
Discs that have more than 1000 folders and files in  
total.  
When both Audio CD format and MP3 files format are  
recorded on a disc. (The disc is recognized to be an  
Audio CD and only tracks in the Audio CD format are  
played back.).  
8
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
8
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Recording  
Recording Format  
Discs and Recording Formats  
DVD-RW and DVD-R discs can be recorded with this  
recorder. The recording format that can be selected may  
vary according to the disc version and types of disc.  
There are two recording formats available with this  
recorder consisting of the VR mode and Video mode.  
The recording format that can be selected may differ  
depending on the disc. Refer to the section on Discs and  
Recording Formats.  
Recording Formats  
Types of Discs  
VR Mode  
Video Mode  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
×
×
VR (Video Recording) Mode  
The VR mode is the basic DVD-RW recording format,  
and lets you enjoy the various editing functions  
available with this recorder.  
×
×
×
(CPRM compatible  
)
DVD-R  
When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it  
can be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also  
allows the recording time to be increased.  
Recorded discs can only be played back with DVD-  
RW-compatible DVD players*1.  
• “Copy-onceprograms can also be recorded*2.  
Make sure to use a disc that has the words For Videoor  
For recordingon the disc or disc jacket for recording  
and playback with this recorder.  
DVD-RW Discs  
DVD-RW discs are available in Ver. 1.1 or Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM).  
*1: Although there are some cases in which the disc  
must be finalized, the disc can be recorded and  
erased after it has been finalized.  
Ver. 1.1 discs can be recorded in either the VR mode  
or Video mode*1.  
In the case a disc has been recorded in the VR  
mode, it can be recorded and erased repeatedly.  
Erasure also allows the recording time to be in-  
creased.  
In the case a disc has been recorded in the Video  
mode, although additional recordings can be made  
until the disc is full, recording time cannot be  
increased by erasure*2.  
When a disc is initialized, all of its recorded contents  
can be erased allowing it to be recorded even if it has  
been recorded in the Video mode. (Refer to pages 12  
and 88 regarding initialization.)  
The following mark is indicated on DVD-RW-  
compatible DVD players.  
This mark indicates that the player on  
which it is indicated has the function of  
being able to play back DVD-RW discs  
recorded in the VR mode with a DVD  
recorder.  
*2: When using a disc compatible with DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM). Recorded programs cannot be played back  
with other DVD players (including DVD-RW players)  
or DVD recorders not compatible with CPRM.  
Video Mode  
*1: Recordings in the VR mode and Video mode cannot  
be mixed on one disc.  
*2: Recording time can only be increased when the last  
title is erased (titles cannot be erased after a disc  
has been finalized).  
This recording format is compatible with commercially  
available DVD players and DVD-ROM drives.  
Discs recorded in the Video mode can be played  
back with other DVD players by finalizing them after  
recording. (However, this does not guarantee that  
these discs can be played back on all DVD players.)  
When recording in the Video mode, discs can be  
played back, additionally recorded and edited only  
with this recorder until they are finalized. Editing-  
functions are limited.  
DVD-R Discs  
DVD-R discs can only be recorded in the Video  
mode.  
Although additional recordings can be made until the  
disc is full, disc space does not increase even if titles  
are erased (because erasure here refers only to  
making the titles not visible).  
Recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs using the Video  
mode (video format) employ a new standard  
approved by the DVD Forum in 2000, and  
Although these discs can be played back with other  
DVD players once they have been finalized, the discs  
can no longer be recorded or erased after they have  
been finalized.  
Discs can be additionally recorded and edited with  
this recorder only until they are finalized.  
compatibility with this standard is left to the discretion  
of the respective DVD player manufacturer.  
Consequently, there are some models of DVD players  
and DVD-ROM drives that are unable to play back  
DVD-R/RW discs.  
• “Copy-onceprograms cannot be recorded.  
Important!  
This recorder cannot be used to record CD-R or CD-RW  
discs.  
9
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
9
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Recording  
RecordingTime  
The recording mode that can be set varies according to  
the recording format. Refer to the table below for the  
applicable recording mode.  
˝ Video Mode  
Additional recordings can be made with this recorder  
provided there is available space on the disc until the  
disc is finalized. (Additional recordings and erasure  
cannot be performed once the disc has been finalized.)  
The remaining time cannot be returned to the status prior  
to recording, and recordings cannot be overwritten.  
Recording  
Mode  
Recording format  
Recordable Time  
Description  
VR Mode  
Video Mode  
FINE  
About 60 minutes  
(About 90 minutes)  
About 120 minutes  
(About 180 minutes)  
About 240 minutes  
(About 300 minutes)  
When you want to record  
high-quality images  
This is the standard  
recording mode  
The Erase Titleediting function is for not displaying  
unnecessary titles. The available disc space does not  
increase. (In the case of DVD-RW discs, available disc  
space can be increased only by erasing the last title  
provided the disc has not yet been finalized.)  
×
×
SP  
LP  
×
×
×
×
When you want to record  
for a long period of time  
with slightly lower image  
quality  
×
EP  
About 360 minutes  
When you want to place  
priority on recording time  
Cautions Regarding Recording  
˝ When Recording in the Video Mode  
Recordable time is based on the recording time when  
using a 4.7 GB disc. Since recording capacity varies  
according to the recorded material, there may be times  
where there is much more disc space remaining on the  
disc when recording is completed.  
Values for recording time shown in parentheses ( )  
indicate the time of Exact Rec. function. (A recordable  
time of about 300 minutes in the LP mode is the  
recordable time in the VR mode.)  
* Since recording by DVD is performed using VBR  
(variable bit rate, refer to the section on VBR Control on  
page 103) with the exception of some recording modes,  
recording time varies according to the recorded material.  
Since images are recorded in 30 second units (1  
minute units in the LP mode), images may be  
recorded briefly after recording has been stopped.  
When recording onto a DVD-R disc, press ÆREC  
twice. If ÆREC is only pressed once, recording will be  
paused. Recording starts when ÆREC is pressed  
again. (The procedure for starting a recording can be  
changed (page 86)).  
˝ Always Make Sure to Test Record First  
Make a test recording with a DVD-RW disc (VR mode)  
first before making any important recordings to  
confirm whether or not the recorded material is  
recorded properly.  
˝ Compensation for Recordings  
Recordable time may be shorter than that indicated above in  
the case of recording material of poor image quality such as  
broadcasts from televisions with poor reception.  
The total of recording time and remaining time may not always  
agree with the recordable time of the recording mode.  
Block-like images may become conspicuous during scenes  
containing rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital  
image compression technology.  
In the event a recording is unable to be made due to a  
problem with this recorder or a disc, or due to an  
external factor such as a power failure or  
condensation of moisture and so forth, the  
manufacturer is not responsible for compensation for  
unrecorded contents or incidental damages.  
˝ Be Careful of Scratches and Dust  
Disc Remaining Time  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs are sensitive to dust,  
fingerprints and especially scratches. A scratched  
disc may not be able to be recorded, or important  
data recorded may not be able to be played back.  
Handle discs with care and store them in a safe  
place.  
˝ VR Mode  
Additional recordings can be made as long as there is  
available space on the disc. (Additional recordings  
can also be made after the disc is finalized.)  
Erasing unnecessary original recordings (page 71)  
lets you increase the remaining time on the disc. (The  
disc can also be erased after it has been finalized.)  
10  
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
10  
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Recording  
Using the Proper Disc  
Select the disc used and recording format according to  
the objective of the recording.  
Unrecordable Material  
˝ Video recordings protected by a copy guard (a signal that  
controls copying to prevent recording) cannot be  
Select the disc and recording format by referring to the  
table below.  
recorded.  
Example:  
˝
DVD videos  
˝
PPV (pay-per-view) broadcasts  
Objective  
Disc Used  
Recordable  
DVD-R disc  
Recording Format  
˝ The proper image may not be able to be obtained in the  
case a copy guard is contained in the images of  
equipment connected to the external input jacks (IN 1,  
IN 2, IN 3 or DV) of this recorder.  
When you want to play  
back a recorded disc  
with a DVD player or DVD  
video-compatible PC  
When not re-recording  
a recorded disc (when  
making a permanent  
recording or when you  
do not want the  
Video mode  
recording  
+
finalization  
processing  
4.7  
Example:  
˝
Images not output at proper brightness  
Incorrect output of picture size (page 80) and other data  
Connect such equipment directly to your TV without  
going through this recorder.  
˝
˝ In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a source  
video that occurs partway through recording, recording is  
paused at that point. Recording resumes when the copy  
guard signal is no longer present, while no recordings will  
be made for the part where the copy prevention signal is  
present.  
˝ This recorder is equipped with a copy guard function that  
prevents recording of video software or broadcast  
programs that contain a signal that restricts copying in  
accordance with copyrights and so forth.  
recording to be erased)  
When you want to play  
back a recorded disc with DVD-RW disc Video mode  
a DVD player or DVD  
Video-compatible PC  
When you want to  
repeatedly record and  
erase a recorded disc  
When you want to edit  
a disc recorded with  
this recorder  
When playing back with Ver. 1.1  
a DVD-RW-compatible  
player (a player  
Recordable  
Ver. 1.1 or Ver. recording  
1.1 (CPRM-  
compatible)  
+
finalization  
processing  
Recordable  
DVD-RW disc  
Ver. 1.1 or  
VR mode  
recording  
+
(finalization  
processing)  
(CPRM-  
compatible)  
containing the mark  
indicated below)  
When you want to  
repeatedly record and  
erase a recorded disc  
When you want to  
record a copy-once”  
Recordable  
DVD-RW disc  
satellite broadcast, etc. Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM-  
VR mode  
recording  
compatible)  
11  
DV_RW2U#p02-11.p65  
11  
03.1.9, 7:30 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initialization and Finalization  
Initialization (Format)  
Initialization is required when using DVD-RW discs in theVideo mode. (See page 88 for details about Initialization)  
When an unused DVD-RW disc is placed in the recorder immediately after it has been purchased, the recorder is set to  
automatically begin initializing in the VR mode. The settings can also be changed so that discs are initialized in the Video  
mode (page 86).  
When using a DVD-RW disc in the Video mode without changing this setting, initialize the disc in the Video mode after first  
completing initialization in the VR mode (page 88).  
• Initialization causes the entire previously recorded contents of the disc to be erased.  
• It takes about 1 minute to 1 minute and 30 seconds for initialization to be completed.  
Allowing Discs to be Played Back with Other DVD Players (Finalization)  
Discs must always be finalized in order to play them back with another DVD player after having been recorded in  
the Video mode. (See page 88 for details about Finalization)  
Finalize discs on which all recordings have been completed so that they can be viewed with another DVD player or a DVD  
video-compatible PC. Discs that are not finalized may not be able to be played back with other DVD players or DVD video-  
compatible PCs. (However, this does not guarantee that finalized discs can be played back on all DVD players or DVD video-  
compatible PCs.)  
• Finalizing a DVD-R disc prevents all recordig and editing of that disc.  
• Although DVD-RW discs can be re-recorded by initializing even after they have been recorded in the Video mode and  
finalized, all previously recorded contents are erased.  
• Finalizing is required if a disc recorded in the VR mode cannot be played back with a DVD-RW-compatible player. (Discs  
can be recorded and edited even after finalizing in the case of the VR mode.)  
• Finalizing takes from several minutes to about an hour. (Processing takes longer time if there is considerable available  
space on the disc.)  
About the Contents of the Disc  
Title, Chapter and Tracks  
• DVDs are divided into “Titles” and “Chapters”. If the disc has more than one movie on it, each movie would be a separate  
“Title”. “Chapters”, on the other hand, are subdivisions of titles.  
Example: DVD  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
• Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into “Tracks”. You can think of a “Track” as one tune on an Audio CD.  
Example: Video CDs or Audio CD  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Recording on a DVD-RW Disc in the VR Mode  
An once recording is treated as a single title (or one chapter). However, a chapter marker (division) is inserted automati-  
cally if the recording is paused or a scene is erased during editing. In addition, you can also insert a chapter marker  
(division) at your favorite scene (page 66).  
Recording on a DVD-R or DVD-RW Disc in theVideo Mode  
An once recording is treated as a single title, and recordings are automatically divided into chapters every 3 minutes.  
Although the interval at which recordings are divided into chapters can be changed to either 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10  
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes or off (page 86), you cannot insert a chapter at a desired scene.  
NOTE  
Numbers identify each title, chapter, and track on a disc. Most discs have these numbers recorded on them, but some do not.  
12  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
12  
03.1.9, 7:31 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Contents of the Disc  
The icons used in this  
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case  
When you buy a DVD Video disc, the back of the disc case  
ususally contains various information about the contents of  
the disc.  
Operation Manual  
DVD VIDEO  
.............. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD Video discs.  
... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD-RW discs.  
VR MODE:  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
DVD RW  
VIDEO MODE  
1
2
1. English  
2. Chinese  
1. English  
2. Chinese  
2
Indicates the functions that can be  
recording in VR mode or playback a  
disc recorded in VR mode.  
2
3
4
5
VIDEO MODE:  
Indicates the functions that can be  
recording in Video mode or playback  
a disc recorded in Video mode.  
1 23  
4 56  
16:9 LB  
2
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
CD-R  
................... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD-R discs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for Video CDs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for Audio CDs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for CD-R.  
1
Audio tracks and audio formats  
DVD discs can contain up to 8 separate tracks with a  
different language on each. The first in the list is the  
original track.  
This section also details the audio format of each  
soundtrackDolby Digital, DTS, etc.  
CD-RW  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for CD-RW.  
Dolby Digital  
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.  
that gives movie theater ambience to audio output when  
the recorder is connected to a Dolby Digital 5.1 channel  
processor or amplifier.  
DTS  
DTS is a digital sound system developed by Digital  
Theater Systems for use in cinemas. This system uses 6  
audio channels and provides accurate sound field  
positioning and realistic acoustics. (By Connecting a  
DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen to  
DTS Digital Surround sound.)  
Linear PCM  
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio  
CDs.  
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with  
16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is recorded at between  
48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)  
2
3
4
Subtitle languages  
This indicates the kind of subtitles.  
Screen aspect ratio  
Movies are shot in a variety of screen modes.  
Camera Angle  
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes, which  
have been simultaneously shot from a number of  
different angles (the same scene is shot from the front,  
from the left side, from the right side, etc.).  
5
Region code  
This indicates the region code (playable region  
number).  
13  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
13  
03.1.9, 7:31 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions During Use  
Disc Precautions  
Copyright  
It is the intent of Sharp that this product be used in full  
compliance with the copyright laws of the United States  
and that prior permission be obtained from copyright  
owners whenever necessary.  
Proper Disc Storage  
Place the disc in the center of  
the disc case and store the  
case and disc upright.  
Avoid storing discs in locations  
subject to direct sunlight, next  
to heating appliances or in  
locations of high humidity.  
Do not drop discs or subject  
them to strong vibrations or  
impacts.  
Avoid storing discs in locations  
where there are large amounts  
of dust or locations where mold  
tends to grow easily.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property right owned by Macrovision  
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright  
protectinon technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603,  
4,577,216, 4,819,098 and 4,907,093 licensed for  
limited viewing uses only.  
Handling Precautions  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, Pro Logicand the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• “DTSand DTS Digital Surroundare trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Certain audio features of this product manufactured  
under a license from Desper Products, Inc. Spatializer®  
N-2-2and the circle-in-square device are trademarks  
owned by Desper Products, Inc.  
If the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a soft, damp  
(water only) cloth. When wiping discs, always move the  
cloth from the center hole toward the outer edge.  
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner,  
static electricit prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
Do not touch the surface.  
DVD logo are registered trademark.  
i.Link refers to the IEEE 1394-1995 industry specification  
Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.  
If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched, the  
recorder may decide that the disc is incompatible and  
eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc correctly.  
Wipe any soiling off the playing surface with a soft cloth.  
and extensions thereof. The  
logo is used for products  
compliant with the i.Link standard.  
are trademark.  
“Licensed under one or more of U.S. Pat. 4,972,484,  
5,214,678, 5,323,396, 5,530,655, 5,539,829, 5,544,247,  
5,606,618, 5,610,985, 5,740,317, 5,777,992, 5,878,080  
or 5,960,037.”  
Cleaning the Pick Up Lens  
Never use commercially available cleaning discs. The  
use of these discs can damage the lens.  
Request cleaning of the lens to the nearest Sharp  
Authorized Service Center.  
Warning of Dew Formation  
Dew may form on pick up lens or disc in the following  
conditions:  
Immediately after a heater has been turned on.  
In a steamy or very humid room.  
When the recorder is suddenly moved from a cold  
environment to a warm one.  
When dew forms:It becomes difficult for the recorder to  
read the signals on the disc and  
prevents the recorder from operating  
properly.  
To remove dew: Take out the disc and leave the power  
on for about 1 hour. The recorder will  
again operate proprely when the dew  
has evaporated.  
14  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
14  
03.1.9, 7:31 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Main Unit (Front)  
2
3
1
4 5 6  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
-
(
)
DV IN/OUT  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
MONO -AUDIO-R  
LINE IN 2  
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
7 8  
9
0
q wer  
t
y u i  
(
)
(
)
0 DISC IN indicator P.29  
1 POWER P.29  
(
)
(
)
q STANDBY indicator P.28  
2 Disc tray P.29  
(
)
(
)
w TIMER indicator P.53  
e AV AUTO REC indicator P.61  
3
OPEN/CLOSE P.29  
(
)
( )  
P.24  
4 CHANNEL  
/
(
)
(
)
r DISC TIMER indicator P.56  
5 TIMER ON/OFF P.52  
(
)
(
(
)
t SKIP  
/
P.32  
6
REC P.48  
7 RESET P.101  
(
)
)
y
u
i
STILL/PAUSE P.33  
(
(
)
)
(
)
PLAY P.29  
STOP P.29  
8 DV IN/OUT terminal P.95  
9 LINE IN 2  
· AUDIO input jacks  
· VIDEO input jack  
· S-VIDEO input jack  
Front Panel Display  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fast forward  
Fast reverse  
Slow  
Finalize  
Initialize  
Loading  
Stopped  
Playing  
Recording  
Restore  
Writitng disc  
management  
information  
Erasing  
Still/Pause  
Tray open  
Tray closed  
Recording Pause  
(
)
(
)
)
1 Recording Mode indicator P.48  
6 Progressive indicator P.80  
7 Recording mark P.48  
(
)
(
2 Tamper Proof indicator P.79  
3 Disc Type indicator  
8 Video mode disc-in indicator  
9 Disc remain time indicator P.28  
(
)
(
)
4
Simple Timer Recording indicator P.51  
(
)
5 Angle indicator P.35  
15  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
15  
03.1.14, 9:16 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Main Unit (Rear)  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
LINE  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
PR  
To an AC outlet  
1
2
COMPONENT  
OUT  
3
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
-
-
LINE  
IN 1  
AUTO  
REC  
R AUDIO L  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
(480I/480P)  
Y
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
PB  
IN 3  
OUT  
PR  
7
45 6  
1 LINE IN 1 (AUTO REC)  
· AUDIO input jacks  
· VIDEO input jack  
· S-VIDEO input jack  
2 COMPONENT VIDEO output jacks P.20  
5 LINE IN 3  
· AUDIO input jacks  
· VIDEO input jack  
· S-VIDEO input jack  
6 Output jacks  
(
)
(
)
·
·
·
3 ANTENNA IN (antenna or cable iput) P.19  
4 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL terminal P.93  
AUDIO output jacks  
VIDEO output jack  
S-VIDEO output jack  
(
)
(
)
7 ANTENNA OUT P.19  
16  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
16  
03.1.9, 7:31 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Remote Control Unit  
Operating Renge of Remote Control  
o
p
1
2
OPEN/CL  
POWER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DISC  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
TIMER  
POWER  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
a
s
d
f
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
About 30°  
Front 22.96ft.  
About 30°  
TITLE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
SET/  
POWER  
RETURN  
ENTER  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
g
h
j
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
(
)
)
(
)
p OPEN/CLOSE P.29  
1 TIMER ON/OFF P.52  
0
REC MODE  
(
)
(
)
a CH  
/
P.24  
)
2 POWER P.29  
k
l
;
(
(
)
s INPUT P.96  
3 AUDIO P.36  
4 ANGLE P.35  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
q
w
100  
(
)
(
)
d ZOOM P.35  
(
)
REV  
FWD  
(
)
f MENU P.30  
5 SETUP/FUNCTION P.24  
(
+ (  
)
)
(
)
g SET/ENTER P.24  
h VCR PLUS P.52  
6 DNR P.36  
PLAY  
z
x
c
e
r
(
)
7 TITLE P.30  
8 CURSOR (  
9 RETURN P.27  
0 Number buttons P.24  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
(
(
)
j TIMER PROG. P.54  
/
/
)
/
) P.24  
STOP  
(
)
(
k REC MODE P.48  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
(
)
v
b
n
m
l PROGRAM (P.37)/  
SLOW  
EDIT  
t
y
u
i
[REPEAT] (P.39)  
(
)
)
q 100, AM/PM P.26  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
(
)
(
(
; ERASE P.37  
w
e
r
PLAY P.29  
REV P.32  
REC P.48  
VOL  
CH  
POWER INPUT  
(
)
)
)
z
x
c
v
FWD P.32  
(
(
)
STOP P.29  
STILL/PAUSE P.33  
TV CONTROL  
(
)
),  
(
)
(
t SKIP SEARCH P.33  
y DISPLAY P.28  
u ON SCREEN P.28  
i TV Function Control P.18  
(
(
)
F.ADV  
SKIP  
(
P.33  
)
(
)
(
)
P.32  
)
b
SLOW P.32  
(
)
(Power/INPUT/VOL/CH)  
n EDIT P.64  
(
)
(
)
m ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST P.30  
o DISC TIMER P.56  
Loading the Batteries  
1 Open the battery cover 2 Load the batteries.  
3 Close the battery cover  
by lowering the lid in  
the direction of the  
arrow.  
by pulling the lid in the  
direction of the arrow.  
Load the two AAsize batteries (R6,  
UM/SUM-3) supplied with the remote  
control unit so that the battery poles  
and  
are positioned as indicated.  
NOTE  
Do not subject the remote control unit to shock, water or excessive humidity.  
The remote control unit may not function if the recorders sensor is in direct sunlight or any other strong light.  
Incorrect use of batteries may cause them to leak or burst. Read the battery warnings and use the batteries properly.  
Do not mix old and new batteries, or mix brands in use.  
Remove the batteries if you do not use the remote control unit for an extended peried of time.  
17  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
17  
03.1.9, 7:31 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Operating a TV Using the  
Remote Control  
Setting the Remote  
Control Code  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
• There are two types of codes (remote  
control codes) for operating this recorder  
with the remote control (RC1 and RC2). If  
you operate this recorder with the remote  
control while using with another SHARP  
DVD recorder or DVD player placed next to  
it and both units end up being operated  
simultaneously, switching the remote control  
code (for both the recorder and the remote  
control) to one of the two signals (RC1 or  
RC2) will let you operate only the recorder.  
• Make sure to set the recorder and remote  
control to the same remote control code.  
You will not be able to operate the recorder  
with the remote control if different remote  
control codes are used.  
(
Universal Remote Control)  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
The Universal Remote Control may operate the  
basic functions of 21 different types of TVs.  
To enter the Manufacturers Code for your TV,  
follow the instructions below.  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
There is no guarantee that the universal  
remote control will function with your TV.  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Setting the  
Manufacturer’s Code  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
1 Press POWER and CH ' of TV  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
CONTROL simultaneously.  
STOP  
2 Enter the 2-digit Manufacturer’s  
Code with the number buttons  
(Ex. 02-“0”, “2”) within 10  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
Important!  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
If the remote control codes of the recorder  
and remote control are different, the remote  
control code will flash on the display of the  
recorder. Reset the remote control number  
to the code flashing on the display.  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
seconds after releasing POWER  
and CH ' of TV CONTROL.  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
3 Point the remote control unit  
Note  
towards the TV and then press  
• The remote control code of the remote become  
“RC 1” when you change the batteries.  
POWER of TV CONTROL.  
• If the TV turns on/off, setup was  
successful. If not, repeat the proce-  
dure using another code.  
Setting the Remote  
Control Code of the  
Recorder  
Refer to the list below for the Manufacturer’s Code  
and the buttons which work with each brand.  
POWER  
Buttons on the Remote  
CH '/"  
INPUT  
Brand  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
FUNAI  
Code  
19  
17  
VOL  
/
1 Press POWER to turn off the  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
recorder.  
06  
GE  
07, 09  
18  
15  
2 Press and hold CHANNEL" and  
GOLDSTAR  
HITACHI  
JVC  
' on the recorder together for  
16  
more than 5 seconds.  
09  
11  
• Each time the button is pressed, the  
code of the recorder toggles between  
“RC-1” and “RC-2”.  
• At this point, the recorder can no  
longer be operated with the remote  
control. Next, set the remote control  
code for the remote control.  
MAGNAVOX  
MITSUBISHI  
PANASONIC  
PIONEER  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
14  
13, 21  
03  
07, 09  
20  
17  
01  
02  
SHARP  
×
×
×
×
×
Setting the Remote  
Control Code of the  
SONY  
10  
TECHNOL ACE  
TOSHIBA  
04  
12  
05  
08  
Remote  
ZENITH  
Example: Setting the “RC2”.  
NOTE  
• If the batteries in the remote control unit are  
changed, the code settings must be re-entered.  
• Some brands have more than one code  
listed above, due to changes in the codes.  
In such cases, try another code to find the  
code that operates your TV.  
1 Press and hold POWER and 2  
together for more than 5 seconds.  
• When you set the code to “RC1”, press  
and hold POWER and 1 together.  
2 The recorder is turned on.  
18  
DV_RW2U#p12-18.p65  
18  
03.1.14, 9:17 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Conneciton  
Easy Connection  
The following connection is the basic connection to watch or record TV programs.  
To use cable box or satellite receiver, see “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connec-  
tions” on page 21.  
1 Connect theTV antenna  
cable to the IN FROM  
ANTENNA jack on the rear  
of this recorder.  
Important!  
2 Connect the OUT TO TV  
jack on the rear of this  
recorder to the antenna  
input jack on your VCR  
using a coaxial cable.  
• This recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. The playback  
picture from this recorder will not appear correctly on your TV when you  
connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this recorder) using  
Video/Audio cables.  
• Be sure to turn off and unplug from the wall outlet this recorder and all  
equipments before connecting the cables.  
NOTE  
TV  
• If you connect this recorder directly  
to your TV, skip the next step.  
• The input signal to IN FROM  
ANTENNA jack is passed through to  
the OUT TO TV jack.  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
IN 1 jacks  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
IN 2 jacks  
3 Connect the antenna  
output jack on your VCR to  
antenna input jack on your  
TV using a coaxial cable.  
Video/Audio  
Video/Audio  
cable  
(Supplied)  
cable  
(Commercially  
available)  
To antenna  
input jack  
3
Coaxial cable  
(Commercially available)  
4
Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks on this recorder  
to the VIDEO/AUDIO input  
jacks on your TV using a  
Video/Audio cable.  
4
5
To antenna  
output jack  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
VCR  
Be sure that the colors of the  
jacks and plugs match up when  
connecting the cable.  
To antenna  
input jack  
NOTE  
Coaxial cable  
(Supplied)  
• To connect using S-Video or  
component cables, see “Using  
other types of video output” on the  
next page.  
2
To OUT TO  
TV  
The Recorder  
To IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
5 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks on your VCR  
to the VIDEO/AUDIO input  
jacks on your TV using a  
Video/Audio cable.  
IN FROM  
COMPONENT  
ANTENNA  
LINE  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
PR  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
Important!  
• When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE” in “PLAYBACK  
SETUP” to “OFF”. (When the  
setting is “ON”, the disc playback  
picture cannot be viewed.)  
Antenna cable 1  
To Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
After the Connection  
Plug in the power cords of the TV and  
VCR. Then go to “EZ Set Up” (see  
page 23).  
19  
DV_RW2U#p19-23.p65  
19  
03.1.14, 11:18 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Conneciton  
Connecting Using  
an S-Video Output  
Connect the S-VIDEO output  
jack on this recorder to the S-  
VIDEO input jack on your TV  
using a S-VIDEO cable (Com-  
mercially available).  
Using Other Types of Video Output  
In order to view clearer DVD images, it is recommended that you use a commer-  
cially available S-Video or component video cable when connecting your TV to the  
video output.  
TV  
To S-VIDEO  
input jack  
Important!  
When using this connection, set  
PROGRESSIVEin PLAYBACK  
SETUPto OFF. (When the  
setting is ON, the disc playback  
picture cannot be viewed.)  
S-VIDEO cable  
(Commercially  
available)  
After the Connection  
The Recorder  
Plug in the power cords of the TV. Then  
go to EZ Set Up(see page 23).  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
LINE  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
R  
Connecting Using  
the Component  
Video Output  
To S-VIDEO  
output jack  
TV  
Connect the COMPONENT OUT  
jacks on this recorder to the  
COMPONENT input jacks on  
your TV using a Component  
Video cable (Commercially  
available).  
To COMPONENT  
input jacks  
Component  
Video cable  
(Commercally  
available)  
Important!  
If your TV is compatible with  
progressive-scan component  
video, set PROGRESSIVEin  
PLAYBACK SETUPto ON. If  
your TV is not compatible with  
progressive-scan video, set to  
OFF.  
The Recorder  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
-
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
PR  
After the Connection  
Plug in the power cords of the TV. Then  
go to EZ Set Up(see page 23).  
To COMPONENT  
OUT jacks  
20  
DV_RW2U#p19-23.p65  
20  
03.1.9, 7:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections  
1 Connect theTV antenna  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (1)  
The following connection is the connection to a cable box or satellite receiver  
when receiving only a few scrambled channels. When many or all the channels  
are scrambled, see the connection on the next page.  
and coaxial cables as  
shown on the left.  
You can watch and record the TV  
channels.  
Using this connection, you can:  
• Record unscrambled CATV signals by selecting them on this recorder.  
• Record scrambled CATV signals by selecting them on the cable box or satellite  
receiver and using AV AUTO REC function (See page 60).  
• Record another channel while you watch one channel.  
NOTE  
• The input signal to IN FROM  
ANTENNA jack is passed through to  
the OUT TO TV jack.  
TV  
2 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks on this  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
input jacks  
recorder to the VIDEO/  
AUDIO input jacks on your  
TV using a Video/Audio  
cable.  
You can watch discs.  
Video/Audio  
cable  
(Supplied)  
3 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
IN 1 jacks on this recorder  
to the VIDEO/AUDIO output  
jacks on your cable box or  
satellite receiver using a  
2
Coaxial cable  
(Commercially available)  
To antenna  
input jack  
1
To antenna  
output jack  
Cable box/  
Satellite receiver  
Video/Audio cable.  
You can record scrambled CATV  
channels when using a cable box  
or satellite receiver for decoding.  
NOTE  
To antenna  
input jack  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
• This is a standard video connec-  
tions. You can use S-Video or  
component connections if they are  
available.  
Coaxial cable  
(Supplied)  
Video/Audio cable  
(Commercially available)  
3
1
To OUT TO  
TV  
IN 1 (AUTO REC)  
VIDEO/AUDIO jacks  
Important!  
• Connect this recorder directly to  
your TV and not via the VCR, cable  
box or satellite receiver.  
• When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE” in “PLAYBACK  
SETUP” to “OFF”. (When the  
setting is “ON”, the disc playback  
picture cannot be viewed.)  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
I
I-IE
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
PR  
The Recorder  
To IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
After the Conneciton  
Plug in the power cords of the TV and  
cable box/satellite receiver. Then go to  
“EZ Set Up” (see page 23).  
Antenna cable 1  
To Antenna/CATV  
wall outlet  
21  
DV_RW2U#p19-23.p65  
21  
03.1.14, 11:29 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections  
1 Connect theTV antenna  
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (2)  
and coaxial cables as  
The following connection is the connection to a cable box or satellite receiver  
when receiving many or all the channels are scrambled.  
shown on the left.  
You can watch and record the TV  
channels.  
Using this connection, you can:  
• Record any CATV signals by selecting them the cable box or satellite receiver.  
• Record using AV AUTO REC function.  
NOTE  
• The input signal to IN FROM  
ANTENNA jack is passed through to  
the OUT TO TV jack.  
NOTE  
• In this connection, you cannot record another channel while you watch one  
channel.  
2 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks on this  
TV  
recorder to the VIDEO/  
AUDIO input jacks on your  
TV using a Video/Audio  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
input jacks  
cable.  
You can watch discs.  
3 Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO  
IN 1 jacks on this recorder  
to the VIDEO/AUDIO output  
jacks on your cable box or  
satellite receiver using a  
Video/Audio  
cable  
(Supplied)  
To antenna  
input jack  
Coaxial cable  
(Commercially available)  
IN 1 (AUTO REC)  
VIDEO/AUDIO jacks  
2
1
To OUT TO  
TV  
Video/Audio cable.  
You can record scrambled CATV  
channels.  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
LIE  
UDO
VO SVDEO  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
P
B
NOTE  
PR  
• This is a standard video connections.  
You can use S-Video or component  
connections if they are available.  
The Recorder  
To antenna  
input jack  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
Coaxial cable (Supplied)  
Important!  
1
To antenna  
output jack  
• Connect this recorder directly to  
your TV and not via the VCR, cable  
box or satellite receiver.  
Video/Audio cable  
(Commercially available)  
3
• When using this connection, set  
“PROGRESSIVE” in “PLAYBACK  
SETUP” to “OFF”. (When the  
setting is “ON”, the disc playback  
picture cannot be viewed.)  
Cable box/  
Satellite  
receiver  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
To IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
After the Connection  
Antenna cable  
1
Plug in the power cords of the TV and  
cable box/satellite receiver. Then go to  
“EZ Set Up” (see page 23).  
To Antenna/CATV  
wall outlet  
22  
DV_RW2U#p19-23.p65  
22  
03.1.14, 11:30 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EZ Set Up  
Important! (Caution during EZ Set Up):  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
Do not press POWER on the recorder or remote control.  
DISC  
STANDBY  
TIMER  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
The EZ Set Up function automatically sets the tuner channels and clock when the  
antenna cable is connected to the rear of the recorder and the power plug is then  
connected to an AC outlet.  
POWER  
Important!  
When using a cable box:  
See CATV or Satellite Receiver Connectionson page 21.  
Leave POWER on the cable box turned on and select a channel that carries EDS signals.  
1 Make sure that the antenna cable is connected. For connection configuration, refer to “Basic  
Connection” on page 19.  
2 Connect the power plug of the recorder to an AC outlet.  
3 The tuner channels and clock will automatically be set.  
This recorder can monitor and use time-signals (EDS signals), which are provided by some TV stations, to  
automatically adjust the clock. This recorder automatially searches EDS signals, but if you are in a hurry to use timer  
recording or know the channel of the EDS signal carrier in you area, follow the procedure in Auto Clock Settingor  
Manual Clock Setting.  
During Auto Channel Setting  
Channel number is increasing.  
NOTE  
During Auto Clock Setting  
EZ Set Up complete  
Front Panel Display is turned off  
when settiing CLOCK DISPin  
OPTION SETUPto OFF.  
If power is supplied to the recorder before the cable is connected, EZ Set Up will not be able to preset the channels into  
memory. If this occurs, press RESET in the front of the recorder (See page 101). EZ Set Up function will work again.  
If the power is turned on during EZ Set Up, the Auto Channel setting will be interrupted and the turner channels will not be  
able to be preset.  
Auto Clock Setting may take several minutes.  
If the Auto Clock Setting is not completed within 30 minutes, there may be no channels with EDS signals. In this case, set  
the clock manually. (See Manual Clock Settingon page 26.)  
If the antenna signal is weak, the Auto Clock Setting function may not operate.  
During initial channel setting, the channels are set into the AIR channel setting. To watch CATV channel, select CATVon  
the CHANNEL PRESET screen. (See Channel Settingon page 24.)  
23  
DV_RW2U#p19-23.p65  
23  
03.1.9, 7:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channel Setting  
Channel Setting  
This recorder can receive a maximum of 181  
channels as shown below by presetting the  
channels into memory.  
Adding Channel Memory/  
Erasing Channel Memory  
Use this function to manually add or erase  
channels to/from the memory.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
CH  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
(VHF: 2 to 13, UHF: 14 to 69, CATV: 1 to 125)  
TITLE  
1 Select the channel to be added  
with the number buttons and the  
channel to be erased with the CH  
' / " or number buttons.  
SET/  
Important!  
RETURN  
ENTER  
When you use the recorder for the first time,  
press SETUP/FUNCTION. “OSD  
LANGUAGE SETUP” screen appears. You  
should set the language to be used in the  
OSD. See “OSD Language Setting” on page  
27 for details.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
2 Press SETUP/FUNCTION. The  
MENU screen appears. Press ' /  
" to select CHANNELand then  
press SET/ENTER.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION.  
Select “CHANNEL” with ' / "  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
3 Press ' / " to select CH SET”  
and then press \ / | to select  
MANUAL. Then press SET/  
ENTER.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
SETUP  
POWER  
INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
TV CONTROL  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
CHANNEL PRESET  
OSD LANGUAGE  
AIR/CATV  
CH SET  
AIR CATV  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
AUTO MANUAL  
2 Press \ / | to select AIRor  
4 Press \ / | to select ADDif you  
want to add the channel memory  
or ERASEif you want to erase  
the channel memory.  
CATVand then press ".  
Example: AIR  
To watch CATV after EZ Set Up,  
select “CATV”, and then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[ADD]  
3 Press \ / | to set CH SETto  
AUTOthen press SET/ENTER.  
ADD  
03  
CHANNEL PRESET  
AIR/CATV  
CH SET  
AIR CATV  
\ / |  
[ERASE]  
AUTO MANUAL  
4 The automatic tuning will start.  
• The channel display will count up,  
and when finished, the screen returns  
to normal.  
ERASE  
03  
NOTE  
5 Press RETURN to return to the  
• Automatic tuning will not start unless the  
arrow is at “CH SET-AUTO” position.  
• If a button is not pressed within 3 minutes  
during the setting procedure, the screen  
will return to normal.  
CHANNEL PRESET screen.  
If the power is interrupted for more than  
1 hour, AIR / CATV selection must be set again.  
• Automatic tuning will be interrupted if  
SETUP/FUNCTION is pressed before the  
screen returns to normal.  
24  
DV_RW2U#p24-28.p65  
24  
03.1.9, 7:33 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Setting  
5
Press \ / | to selectTIME ZONE.  
• If you want the Recorder to use the  
time zone from which your  
Auto Clock Setting  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
(If you know a channel that carries EDS  
signals)  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
broadcasts with EDS signals, choose  
AUTO. If your broadcasts with EDS  
signals from a different time zone than  
the one in which you live, be sure to  
select your time zone.  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
Important!  
TITLE  
When using a cable box:  
• See “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connec-  
tions” on page 21.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
• Leave POWER on the cable box turned  
on and select a channel that carries EDS  
signals.  
EDS CH SET  
EDS CH  
AUTO MANUAL  
TIMER PROG.  
07  
REC MODE  
TIME ZONE  
AUTO  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION. Press  
' / " to select “CLOCK” and  
then press SET/ENTER.  
REV  
FWD  
6 Press SET/ENTER to enter. The  
PLAY  
screen returns to normal.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
7 Press POWER to turn off the  
SETUP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
recorder.  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
• The Auto Clock Setting function will  
automatically set the clock.  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
OSD LANGUAGE  
TV CONTROL  
NOTE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• If the EDS CH SET mode is set to MANUAL  
mode in Step 3 and a channel that does  
not carry EDS signal is selected in Step 4,  
the Auto Clock Setting function will not  
operate.  
2 Press ' / " to select AUTOand  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• In Step 4, the number of channels that can  
be selected depends on the mode setting  
on the CHANNEL PRESET screen. See the  
table below.  
CLOCK  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AIR/CATV  
AIR  
Channels to be selected  
3 Press \ / | to set EDS CH SET  
mode to MANUALand then  
press ".  
02 03 04  
01 02 03  
68  
69 02  
124 125 01  
CATV  
• In Step 1, if you press SETUP/FUNCTION  
when operating the screen setting for the  
first time, the OSD LANGUAGE SETUP  
screen will appear.  
• If you entered incorrect data during the  
setting procedure, re-enter the correct data  
in the following manner:  
4 Press \ / | to select a channel  
that carries EDS signals and then  
press ".  
Example: 07  
• The number of channels that can be  
selected depends on the mode  
setting on the CHANNEL PRESET  
screen.  
1
Use \ / | to select the data to be corrected.  
2 Set the correct data with ' / ".  
3 After correcting the data in Step 2,  
press SET/ENTER to enter.  
See NOTE.  
• If you press RETURN or SETUP/FUNC-  
TION in Step 6, the data will not be stored.  
• If a button is not pressed within 3 minutes  
during the setting procedure, the screen  
will return to the normal screen.  
When using a cable box:  
Input the output channel (02, 03, or 04)  
of the cable box.  
• “TIME ZONE” is changed as follows.  
AUTO  
ATLANTIC  
ALASKA  
EASTERN  
PACIFIC  
CENTRAL  
HAWAII  
MOUNTAIN  
25  
DV_RW2U#p24-28.p65  
25  
03.1.14, 9:18 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Setting  
Manual Clock Setting  
Automatic Daylight  
Saving-Time (D.S.T.)  
Adjustment  
This recorder is equipped with an internal  
Automatic Daylight Saving-Time Adjustment  
function. In spring (first Sunday in April) and  
autumn (last Sunday in October), the time is  
adjusted as shown below. This function has  
been preset to ON at the factory. Set the  
D.S.T. mode in the clock setting screen.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION. The  
MENU screen appears. Press ' /  
" to select CLOCKand then  
press SET/ENTER.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
CH  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
CLOCK  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
Spring  
100  
2 Press ' / " to select MANUAL”  
REV  
FWD  
Programmed timer recording set within this  
time frame (2:00 AM to 3:00 AM) will not be  
carried out.  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
PLAY  
3 Press \ / | to select TIMEand  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
First Sunday in April (D.S.T. is ON)  
press ' / " to set time.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
1:00 AM  
2:00 AM  
Example: 10:28 AM  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Number buttons can be used instead  
of ' / " to set time and date. Press  
AM/PM to select AM or PM during  
time setting.  
The clock is automatically  
advanced 1 hour.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
3:00 AM  
4:00 AM  
TV CONTROL  
4 Select and set DATE, YEAR”  
Autumn  
Because there will be two time frames from  
1:00 AM to 2:00 AM, timer programming set  
between these times will be influenced by the  
time change.  
and DSTin turn, in the same  
manner as in Step 3.  
See Automatic Daylight Saving-Time  
(D.S.T.) Adjustment.  
Last Sunday in October (D.S.T. is ON)  
Example: Jul. 4, 2003, DST: ON  
1:00 AM  
2:00 AM  
CLOCK  
The clock is automatically  
set back 1 hour.  
TIME  
10:28AM  
DATE  
7/04FRI 03  
YEAR DST  
ON  
1:00 AM  
2:00 AM  
NOTE  
SELECT :  
CHANGE:  
RETURN:  
ENTER  
:
ENTER  
If the timer recording program is affected  
by the D.S.T. time change, check your TV  
listing and find out when it reflects the time  
change. Some TV listings will indicate the  
time change in the same manner as is  
programmed in this recorder, but others do  
not show the time change until the next  
morning. In that case, when programming  
a timer, use the clock setting screen to set  
the D.S.T. mode to OFF so the time change  
will not be carried out.  
5 If the data is correct, press SET/  
ENTER to enter.  
The screen returns to normal.  
NOTE  
If you entered incorrect data during the  
setting procedure, re-enter the correct data  
in the following manner:  
1
Use \ / | to select the data to be corrected.  
2 Set the correct data with ' / ".  
3 After correcting the data in Step 2,  
press RETURN or SET/ENTER to enter.  
If you press RETURN or SETUP/  
FUNCTION to exit the clock setting screen  
in Step 4, the data will not be stored.  
If a button is not pressed within 3 minutes  
during the setting procedure, the screen  
will return to the normal screen.  
26  
DV_RW2U#p24-28.p65  
26  
03.1.9, 7:33 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSD Language Setting  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
display the MENU screen.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
SETUP  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
TITLE  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
OSD LANGUAGE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Important!  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
When you use the recorder for the first time,  
press SETUP/FUNCTION. “OSD  
LANGUAGE SETUP” screen in the step 3  
appears. You should set the language to be  
used in the OSD.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
2 Press ' / " to select “OSD  
LANGUAGE” and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
3 Press ' / " to select the  
language you want to use.  
Example: ENGLISH  
OSD LANGUAGE SETUP  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ESPAÑOL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Press SET/ENTER to enter and  
then press RETURN to return to  
the SETUP screen.  
NOTE  
• If you press RETURN or SETUP/  
FUNCTION to exit the OSD LANGUAGE  
SETUP screen in Step 3, the data will not  
be stored.  
27  
DV_RW2U#p24-28.p65  
27  
03.1.14, 9:18 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Information  
Change the Display  
on theTV Screen  
Each time ON SCREEN on the remote control  
unit is pressed, the display on the TV screen  
changes the mode in the following sequence:  
Change the Display on  
the Front Panel Display  
Each time DISPLAY on the remote control  
unit is pressed, the Front Panel Display  
changes the mode in the following sequence:  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
+
VCR PLUS  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
(When the disc is set)  
TIMER PROG.  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
Disc Information  
REC MODE  
STANDBY  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
• When the recorder is turned off (STANDBY  
indicator lights on), clock is displayed. The  
display goes off automatically after one  
minute (when setting “CLOCK DISP” in  
“OPTION SETUP” to “OFF”).  
100  
AUTO: Displays indicators for 3 seconds  
when operation begins.  
ON: Displays indicators continuously until  
the operation mode is changed.  
OFF: Does not display indicators.  
Disc information:  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
Displays the information on the disc  
when the disc is set. During playback,  
the information is displayed for about  
10 seconds and automatically  
disappear.  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Example: During stop mode  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
I Operation mode screen  
Example:  
Example: When playing back the DVD-RW disc  
03 VR  
--:--:--  
REM 1:59SP  
ORG  
DVD-RW  
02  
STEREO  
The time is not displayed when a disc is  
played back on which the time has not  
been recorded.  
4:55  
AM  
Clock display  
I Disc information screen  
Example: When recording onto the  
DVD-RW disc  
Example:  
TYPE  
TITLE  
:DVD-VIDEO  
:05  
CHAPTER:019  
REMAIN: 1h57m  
SP  
DISC  
:OFF PROTECT:OFF  
NOT FINALIZE  
NOTE  
• This recorder turns off the clock indicator  
on the Front Panel Display to save electric-  
ity when the product is turned off. To  
display the clock indicator during power  
off, set “CLOCK DISP” in “OPTION SETUP”  
to “ON” (See page 90).  
28  
DV_RW2U#p24-28.p65  
28  
03.1.14, 9:18 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Resume Function  
DVD Playback  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
This recorder stores the location where you  
stopped the disc. This function enables you  
to resume the playback from the place last  
stopped.  
POWER  
Playback the  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
INPUT  
playback-only discs  
DNR  
ZOOM  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
DVD VIDEO  
8 Press |PLAY after pressing  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
1 Turn on the TV and switch the TV  
channel to the external “VIDEO”  
or “AV” channel connected to the  
VIDEO/AUDIO output jacks.  
ISTOP in the step 7.  
• Play resumes from a point slightly  
before the point where it was  
stopped.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
• Resume information will not be  
canceled if the power is turned off.  
• Resume function may not work on  
some discs.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
2 Press POWER. The recorder is  
REV  
FWD  
turned on.  
PLAY  
3 Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
RES.  
DVD  
disc tray.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
4 Load a disc onto the tray.  
• Position it with the printed title side  
facing up, align it with the guides.  
• When you load a double-sided disc,  
load it with the side you want to play  
face down.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
NOTE  
The resume function is canceled in the  
following cases.  
• When you press ISTOP during auto-  
playback.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
• When you open the disc tray.  
• When you display the DiscNavi screen.  
• When a DVD-R/RW disc has been edited or  
finalized after playback has been stopped.  
• When you switch between ORIGINAL and  
PLAYLIST.  
5 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the  
Playback From the Beginning  
9 Press ISTOP again.  
10 Press |PLAY.  
disc tray.  
• When the disc is being identified  
(“LOAD” is displayed on the Front  
Panel Display), the DISC IN indicator  
on the front panel is blinking. The  
indicator lights when the disc is  
finished being identified (“LOAD”  
disappears).  
NOTE  
• When taking out a disc, first press ISTOP  
before taking out the disc. When the  
OPEN/CLOSE is pressed during playback,  
it may take a short time for the tray to open.  
• In cases when a disc cannot be played  
back as a result of inserting a non-standard  
disc or the presence of scratches and so  
forth on the disc “INCORRECT TYPE.  
REMOVE DISC.” will appear and all other  
functions of the recorder will be disabled  
except for opening and closing of the tray.  
Take out the disc when this happens.  
• Some discs start playback automati-  
cally.  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
• If you’re playing some DVD-Video  
discs, a disc menu screen may  
appear. See page 45 for how to  
operate the menu.  
7 Press ISTOP to stop playback.  
• When starting playback from the  
place last stopped, go to step 8.  
• When starting playback from the  
beginning, go to step 9.  
29  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
29  
03.1.9, 8:16 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
2 Press TITLE or MENU.  
• DiscNavi Title List screen appears.  
Title number  
Selected Title Playback  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD VIDEO  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
ZOOM  
DISCNAVI(ORG)  
PAGE 1/ 2  
3
1 Press ZOOM during stop mode.  
DNR  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
1
2
Title screen  
TITLE  
MENU  
2 Press number buttons to enter the  
4
5
6
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
title number.  
1/02  
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
• Selected title is played back.  
Title name  
• If a DVD-RW disc (VR mode) has the  
PLAYLIST, you can switch the screens  
between PLAYLIST and ORIGINAL by  
pressing ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST.  
NOTE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
• This function does not work or work  
correctly on some discs.  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
3 Press '/ "/ \ / | to select the  
STILL/PAUSE  
Recorded DVD Disc  
Playback  
STOP  
title screen you want to watch.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
ON  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
DISCNAVI(ORG)  
PAGE 1/ 2  
3
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
1
2
Press \ to  
go to previous  
page  
(When the  
page is first  
page, it goes  
to last page.)  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
• When playing back DVD-R or DVD-RW  
discs recorded with this recorder, first  
select the title where you want to start  
playback.  
4
5
6
Press | to  
go to next  
page.  
1/02  
3:42AM CH  
SELECT  
2 SP  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Select a title by displaying a list of first  
scenes for each title (DiscNavi).  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Selected title is played back.  
Playback After  
NOTE  
Confirming Contents  
with DiscNavi  
• Parts that have been erased (page 65),  
moved (page 75) or added (page 76)  
during editing appear as a momentarly  
paused during playback.  
DiscNavi displays a list of the first scene of  
each title.  
• In the case of titles added with another  
DVD recorder that contain characters  
which cannot be displayed with this  
recorder, the titles are displayed as  
NOTE  
• When the DV input is selected, discs  
cannot be played back if “DV LINK” is set  
to “ON”. You can enjoy other channels by  
switching to the other channel.  
****....” (up to a maximum of 24  
characters).  
• Titles for which recording has been  
interrupted due to a scratched disc, soiled  
disc or other reason are displayed with an  
exclamation point “!” in front of the title  
displayed on the DiscNavi menu and so  
forth.  
1 Load a disc recorded in VR mode.  
• When playing back the playlist of a disc  
that has been edited with another DVD  
recorder, and a single title lasts for 12  
hours or more, that title cannot be played  
back beyond 12 hours.  
• Discs edited with another DVD recorder  
that contain more than 201 chapter  
markers cannot be played back.  
30  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
30  
03.1.14, 9:19 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Playback by Selecting  
a Title  
Video CD/Audio CD/CD-R/  
CD-RW Playback  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
When playing back a disc recorded in the  
Video mode after it has been finalized, play  
back the disc by selecting a title after  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
1 Load a CD and press |PLAY.  
displaying the list of titles by pressing MENU.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2 Press ISTOP to stop the  
+
VCR PLUS  
NOTE  
playback.  
• This function can be used for DVD-R or  
DVD-RW Video mode disc that have been  
finalized.  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Selected Track Playback  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
100  
REV  
FWD  
1 Load a disc recorded in Video  
1 Press number buttons to select  
PLAY  
mode.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
the track number during playback.  
2 Press TITLE or MENU.  
• Title screen appears.  
After Finalize  
STOP  
Example: For track 12, press 1,2.  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
2 Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY.  
• Selected track (music) is played  
back.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
Title List  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
1/01 1:00AM CH  
1/01 8:00AM CH 12 FINE  
1/01 7:00PM CH FINE  
1/20 9:00PM CH 10 SP  
7
FINE  
3/07 5:00AM CH  
3/18 4:00PM CH  
1
4
SP  
TV CONTROL  
FINE  
8
4/6 9:00PM CH 12 SP  
4/24 7:00PM CH FINE  
1
Playing VIDEO CDs with Playback  
Control (PBC)  
2/14 3:00PM CH  
6
SP  
4/26 8:00PM CH 12 SP  
PREV  
EXIT  
NEXT  
• Pressing |PLAY begins PBC playback.  
Time display is not shown for some  
discs.  
• If you specify the track number to be  
played (with playback stopped) and  
press | PLAY, normal playback (not  
PBC playback) begins.  
NOTE  
• When a disc that has been recorded in the  
Video mode is finalized (pages 12 and 88),  
a menu is automatically created that can be  
played back even with other DVD players.  
Consequently, the menu before finalizing is  
different from that of after finalizing.  
• In the case of titles added with another  
DVD recorder that contain characters  
which cannot be displayed with this  
Digital Connection to an MD to  
Record a CD  
When you are using a digital connection to  
record the contents of a CD to an MD, the  
track numbers of the CD may not match  
the track numbers recorded to the MD.  
recorder, the titles are displayed as  
****....” (up to a maximum of 24  
characters).  
NOTE  
• When the DV input is selected, discs  
cannot be played back if “DV LINK” is set  
to “ON”. You can enjoy other channels by  
switching to the other channel.  
3 Press '/ "/ \ / | to select the  
title name.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Selected title is played back.  
31  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
31  
03.1.14, 9:20 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse  
SKIP (Forward/Reverse)  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
AUDIO CD  
AUDIO CD  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
While you are playing a disc, this function  
jumps to the beginning of the next chapter/  
track (Forward) or the current chapter/track  
(Reverse) and automatically starts playing  
that chapter/track.  
Press FWD  
or  
REV during  
TITLE  
playback.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
The disc begins fast scan at ×2 speed (1).  
+
VCR PLUS  
Scanning speed selection  
TIMER PROG.  
1
DVD  
Press SKIP  
or  
SKIP during  
REC MODE  
playback.  
Fast scan image appears here  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
• Playback skips forward one chapter/  
(No image is shown for Audio CDs.)  
REV  
FWD  
track for each time SKIP  
pressed.  
is  
• Three speeds are available for DVD and  
two speeds for CD. Each time FWD  
PLAY  
• If you press  
begins, and you then press  
SKIP and playback  
SKIP  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
or  
REV is pressed, the speed of fast  
STOP  
scan changes in the following se-  
quence:  
(DVD)  
again within 5 seconds, playback  
returns to the beginning of the  
previous chapter/track.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
1 (about ×2)  
2 (about ×8)  
3 (about ×32)  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
NOTE  
(Video CD and Audio CD)  
TV CONTROL  
• On some discs, the skip functions are  
disabled.  
1 (about ×2)  
2 (about ×8)  
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse  
(Search) Function on the  
Recorder  
Slow-Motion  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
1 Press SLOW during playback.  
Press and hold SKIP  
/
for  
• Three speeds are available. Each time  
SLOW is pressed, the speed of slow-  
motion playback changes in the  
following sequence:  
more than 2 seconds on the front of  
the recorder.  
• The search speed is 2 (about ×8).  
1 (about ×1/2)  
2 (about ×1/8)  
3 (about ×1/16)  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
2 Press |PLAY to return to the  
normal playback.  
SKIP  
/
NOTE  
NOTE  
• On some discs, the fast scan function is  
disabled.  
• On DVD discs and Video CDs, audio and  
subtitles are not played back during the  
fast scan playback.  
• On some discs, the slow-motion playback  
functions are disabled.  
• With a DVD disc, you cannot search past a  
title. Playback starts from the beginning of  
the title.  
• During the fast scan playback, the sound  
may not come out.  
• When the fast forward search function is  
used during playback of a DVD video disc,  
the speed may differ from that described in  
this manual depending on the disc and the  
scene being played back.  
32  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
32  
03.1.14, 9:20 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Still/Pause  
Skip Search  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
Frame Advance  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
With this feature, you can set a forward  
search time to approx. 30, 60, 90 or 120  
seconds of recorded material. After  
searching, normal playback will resume  
automatically.  
DVD RW DVD RW  
VR MODE  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VIDEO MODE  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
1 Press STILL/PAUSE during  
SET/  
playback.  
RETURN  
ENTER  
• The playback is stilled.  
• The playback is paused when Audio  
CD is played back.  
+
• Press SKIP SEARCH during playback.  
(Example: during commercials)  
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Number of  
Search Time  
Times Pressed  
2 Press F.ADV  
or  
F.ADV.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
• The disc goes forward by one frame  
each time F.ADV is pressed.  
• The disc goes rewind by one frame  
each time F.ADV is pressed.  
• If you press and hold SKIP for  
100  
REV  
FWD  
1 Time  
2 Times  
3 Times  
4 Times  
Approx. 30 sec.  
Approx. 60 sec.  
Approx. 90 sec.  
Approx. 120 sec.  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
more than 2 seconds on the front of  
the recorder, seach will be started.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
EDIT  
3 Press |PLAY to return to the  
VOL  
CH  
normal playback.  
TV CONTROL  
NOTE  
• On some discs, still/pause and frame  
advance functions are disabled.  
• The frame advance playback functions are  
disabled for Audio CDs.  
NOTE  
• This function can only be used within the  
same title.  
• The frame reverse playback function is  
disabled for Video CDs.  
• Picture quality may diminish during frame  
advance and frame reverse with a disc  
other than a DVD-RW disc in VR mode  
(such as a DVD video disc).  
33  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
33  
03.1.14, 9:21 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MP3 Discs Playback  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
To Play Another File  
(music title) during  
Playback  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
NOTE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
When the DV input is selected, discs  
cannot be played back if DV LINKis set  
to ON. You can enjoy other channels by  
switching to the other channel.  
See page 8 for details about the MP3 file  
format.  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
Press '/"/\/| to select the file  
SET/  
ENTER  
(music title) you want to play and then  
RETURN  
press SET/ENTER.  
The chosen file (music title) will be  
played.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
1 Press POWER. The recorder is  
turned on.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
NOTE  
100  
The file where the cursor is on will be  
played when the cursor is moved to a  
different from the file being played and no  
operation is taken within 10 seconds.  
2 Load the MP3 recorded CD-R or  
the CD-RW and then press TITLE  
or MENU.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1/4  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
MP3  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
To Skip the File during  
Playback  
FOLDER1  
FOLDER3  
FOLDER2  
FOLDER4  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
3 Press '/"/\/| to select the  
Press SKIP  
or  
SKIP.  
folder you want to play and then  
SKIP  
will skip forward, and  
press SET/ENTER.  
SKIP will rewind.  
The file (music title) in the folder is  
displayed on the file selection screen.  
While the MP3 disc is playing  
Time Search is disabled.  
1/53  
MP3  
:FOLDER1  
TITLE02  
TITL
E
0
4  
Programmed playback is disabled.  
It is possible to repeat one track or the  
entire folder.  
1
3
TITLE01  
TITL
E
0
3  
2
4
Dolby Virtual Surraund does not operate.  
Press RETURN to return to the folder  
selection screen.  
When pressing |PLAY after selecting  
the folder, the playback screen is  
displayed, and the files in that folder  
can be played from the beginning.  
4 Press '/"/\/| to select the file  
(music title) you want to play and  
then press SET/ENTER.  
The chosen file (music title) will be  
played in sequence.  
5/53  
0 0:08  
MP3  
:FOLDER1  
1
3
5
7
9
TITLE01  
TITLE03  
TITLE05  
TITLE07  
TITLE09  
2
4
6
8
TITLE02  
TITLE04  
TITLE06  
TITLE08  
1 0 TITLE1 0  
5 Press ISTOP to stop play.  
34  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
34  
03.1.9, 8:18 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Image/Audio During Playback  
Zoom Function  
Angle Function  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
You can zoom the desired part of an image  
during DVD playback.  
DVD VIDEO  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
You can change the angle of view when  
playing a DVD video disc that contains  
scenes recorded from multiple angles.  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
DNR ZOOM INPUT  
FUNCTION  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TITLE  
MENU  
1 Press ZOOM during playback.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
1 Press ANGLE during playback.  
:
Z O OM  
1
+
VCR PLUS  
mark lights when different  
angles are recorded for the title  
currently playing.  
TIMER PROG.  
ZOOM indicator  
REC MODE  
• Show the number of the current  
angle.  
• Each press of ZOOM cycles through  
the zoom settings in the following  
sequence:  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
1
PLAY  
ZOOM 1 (×1.2)  
ZOOM 2 (×1.5)  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
Off ZOOM 3 (×2.0)  
STOP  
• If no angles are recorded on the disc,  
xx is displayed.  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
2 While an image is zoomed, press  
'/"/\/| to shift the view and  
display the part you want.  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
2 Press ' / " (or ANGLE) to  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
change the scene to the next  
TV CONTROL  
angle in those recorded.  
• About 10 seconds later, the indicator  
on the TV will disappear  
The ZOOM indicator changes from white  
to red to let you know when you are trying  
to perform an illegal shift of view.  
automatically. (Or press SET/ENTER  
to turn off the indicator.)  
3 Press ZOOM to return to the  
NOTE  
normal screen  
• The operation differs depending on the  
discs. Refer to the operation manuals for  
your disc.  
NOTE  
• An image may become distorted when  
zoomed.  
You can cancel the zoom operation by  
pressing FWD  
,
REV, TITLE, MENU,  
SETUP/FUNCTION or ISTOP.  
• The zoom operation is cleared automati-  
cally whenever you display a DVD screen  
that enables you to change the scene by  
pressing '/ "/ \ / |.  
• Subtitle cannot be zoomed.  
35  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
35  
03.1.9, 9:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Image/Audio During Playback  
Audio Setting  
DNR (Digital Noise  
Reduction)  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
DVD RW  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
VR MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
You can change the audio output channel  
between stereo, left channel and right  
channel when you play Video CDs and Audio  
CDs. You can change the audio output  
channel when you play a DVD-RW disc  
recorded multiple sounds in VR mode (See  
also page 87).  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
DNR ZOOM INPUT  
FUNCTION  
When the noise contained in recorded  
material being played back becomes a  
problem, you can reduce the noise to make  
the picture clearer. DNR can be set to one of  
three levels according to the recorded  
material being played back. It is recom-  
mended to turn DNR “ON” when playing back  
discs that have been recorded in the LP  
mode or EP mode, and turn DNR “OFF” when  
playing back discs having low noise levels  
such as DVD video discs.  
TITLE  
MENU  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
audio channels changes as follows:  
100  
REV  
FWD  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
PLAY  
L
R
L+R  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1 Press DNR during playback.  
• Each time DNR is pressed, the mode  
changes between “ON” and “OFF”.  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
It may differs depending on the  
recorded sound on the disc. See the  
table of SAP on page 87 for details.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
ON  
TV CONTROL  
2 When the mode is “ON”, press \ /  
NOTE  
• When you play a VR mode disc recorded  
on a Dual Mono, and if you are listening to  
the Dolby Digital sound via the digital  
output jack, you cannot select the audio  
| to adjust the level.  
• Effects are diminished when \ is  
pressed.  
• Effects are enhanced when | is  
pressed.  
channel. Set “  
Digital OUT” in “PLAY-  
BACK SETUP” to “PCM” (See page 81), or  
if you want to change the audio channel,  
listen via the analog output jacks.  
NOTE  
• About 10 seconds later, the indicator on the  
TV will disappear automatically. (Or press  
SET/ENTER to turn off the indicator.)  
• The DNR function does not work when  
setting “PROGRESSIVE” in “PLAYBACK  
SETUP” to “ON”.  
Monitor Output when  
Receiving a Stereo or  
SAP Broadcast  
When receiving a stereo or SAP broadcast,  
press AUDIO to change the audio output  
mode to select Monitor Output. See the table  
of SAP on page 87 for details.  
NOTE  
• When the signal is weak (it is hard to listen)  
in a stereo broadcast, press AUDIO to turn  
off “L R” display on the TV screen and  
change the audio output mode to MONO.  
36  
DV_RW2U#p29-36.p65  
36  
03.1.14, 11:26 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programmed Playback  
NOTE  
Title/Track Programmed  
• Up to 20 titles can be programmed.  
• When you input the title number which has  
not been recorded on the disc, the number  
is not set. Input correct title number.  
• Press ERASE to cancel the program.  
• Press and hold ERASE for about 2  
seconds, all programmed title is canceled.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
Playback  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
VIDEO MODE  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
1 Press PROGRAM while the disc  
SET/  
is stopped.  
RETURN  
ENTER  
• The “TITLE PROGRAM” screen  
appears.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
3 Press |PLAY.  
• The title will be played in the order  
they were entered.  
TITLE PROGRAM  
T=TITLE  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
PROGRAM  
FWD  
AM/PM  
ERASE  
100  
1‰/2‰  
1/ 1  
‰‰:‰‰:2‰  
PROGRAM  
T
C
REV  
DVD  
T
PLAY  
0
~
9
SET  
C
INPUT  
PROGRAM PLAY  
SET  
CLEAR  
PLAY  
RETURN  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
4 Press ISTOP to stop the pro-  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
• Each time PROGRAM is pressed, the  
mode changes between “Title (Track)  
Program” and “Chapter Program”.  
• Press RETURN to return to normal  
screen.  
• Chapter Program does not work on  
Video CDs and Audio CDs.  
Track Program screen is displayed  
when a Video CD or Audio CD is set.  
grammed playback.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
To start programmed playback again,  
repeat step 1 to 3.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
NOTE  
• The program cannot be set during playback.  
• This function can only be used for discs on  
which the title has been recorded.  
• On some discs in which programmed  
playback is prohibited, this function is  
disabled.  
TRACK PROGRAM  
T=TRACK  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
• Programmed playback does not work on  
DVD-RW discs in VR mode.  
T
0
~
9
SET  
C
INPUT  
PROGRAM PLAY  
SET  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
PLAY  
2 Press number buttons to enter the  
desired title number and then  
press SET/ENTER.  
Example:  
• For title 10, press 1, 0 and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• For title 2, press 2 and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
TITLE PROGRAM  
T=TITLE  
T10  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
0
~
9
SET  
C
INPUT  
SET  
CLEAR  
PLAY  
PROGRAM PLAY  
RETURN  
• Repeat step 2 to program other titles.  
37  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
37  
03.1.14, 9:26 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programmed Playback  
NOTE  
Chapter Programmed  
• Up to 20 chapters can be programmed.  
• When you input the chapter number which  
has not been recorded on the disc, the  
number is not set. Input correct chapter  
number.  
• Press ERASE to cancel the program.  
• Press and hold ERASE for about 2  
seconds, all programmed chapter is  
canceled.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
Playback  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO MODE  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
1 Press PROGRAM twice while the  
SET/  
ENTER  
disc is stopped.  
RETURN  
• The “CHAPTER PROGRAM” screen  
appears.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
• Press RETURN to cancel the setting  
CHAPTER PROGRAM  
=
:
=
T TITLE  
C CHAPTER  
PROGRAM  
FWD  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
AM/PM  
ERASE  
4 Press |PLAY.  
100  
REV  
• The chapter will be played in the  
order they were entered.  
PLAY  
0
~
9
SET  
C
INPUT  
PROGRAM PLAY  
SET  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1‰/2‰  
2/1‰  
‰‰:‰‰:2‰  
PROGRAM  
T
C
DVD  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
• Press RETURN to return to normal  
screen.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
5 Press ISTOP to stop the  
2 Press number buttons to enter the  
programmed playback.  
To start programmed playback again,  
repeat step 1 to 3.  
desired title number and then  
TV CONTROL  
press SET/ENTER.  
Example:  
• For title 10, press 1, 0 and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• For title 2, press 2 and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
NOTE  
• The program cannot be set during playback.  
• This function can only be used for discs on  
which the chapter has been recorded.  
• This function does not work on Video CDs  
or Audio CDs.  
CHAPTER PROGRAM  
=
:
=
T TITLE 10  
C CHAPTER  
• On some discs in which programmed  
playback is prohibited, this function is  
disabled.  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
0
~
9
SET  
C
INPUT  
SET  
CLEAR  
PLAY  
PROGRAM PLAY  
RETURN  
3 Press number buttons to enter the  
desired chapter number and then  
press SET/ENTER.  
Example:  
• For chapter 10, press 1, 0 and then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• For chapter 2, press 2 and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
CHAPTER PROGRAM  
=
:
=
T TITLE 10  
C CHAPTER  
C0 02  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
• Repeat step 3 to program other  
chapters.  
38  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
38  
03.1.14, 9:26 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeat Playback  
Repeat Playback  
A-B Repeat Playback  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
1 Press  
(REPEAT) while a disc  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
AUDIO CD  
is playing.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
A-B repeat allows you to repeat specified  
section on the disc.  
Each time  
(REPEAT) is pressed,  
TITLE  
the repeat function changes as  
follows.  
Depending on the disc type, the  
repeat function will vary.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1 Press  
(REPEAT) three times  
+
VCR PLUS  
while a disc is playing.  
TIMER PROG.  
2 While you are playing a disc,  
press SET/ENTER or |PLAY  
when you reach the start of the  
section to be repeated.  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
REC MODE  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASEPROGRAM  
Chapter Repeat  
100  
C
DVD  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
3 While the disc is playing the same  
chapter/track, press SET/ENTER  
or |PLAY again when you reach  
the end of the section to be  
repeated.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
"
Title Repeat  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
T
DVD  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
"
A-B Repeat  
(See right for details.)  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
AA  
B
B
DVD  
"
OFF  
VIDEO CD AUDIO CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
The A-B repeat begins from the point  
where you specified in step 2.  
Track Repeat  
4 Press  
(REPEAT) to retern to  
T
DVD  
the normal playback.  
NOTE  
"
Repeat all files in the disc  
To cancel A-B repeat, press ISTOP,  
TITLE, MENU or other buttons.  
A-B repeat can only be used within the  
same title/track.  
(On some DVD discs, A-B repeat is  
restricted to the same chapter.)  
If the title/track finishes before specifying  
the ending location (B), the location where  
the title/track finishes will be set as the  
ending location (B).  
The A-B repeat function cannot be used  
during programmed playback.  
The A-B repeat function does not operate  
in scenes where different camera angles  
are recorded.  
DVD  
"
A-B Repeat  
(See right for details.)  
"
OFF  
2 Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY to  
start repeat playback.  
Press  
(REPEAT) and select OFF  
to return to the normal playback.  
NOTE  
The A-B repeat cannot be used on Video  
CDs with PBC mode playback.  
Repeat playback is disabled on some  
discs.  
Repeat playback cannot be used during  
programmed playback.  
Repeat playback cannot be used on Video  
CDs with PBC mode playback.  
39  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
39  
03.1.9, 7:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Control  
While the disc is playing, press SETUP/FUNCTION to display the screen shown below. Using Function control, you can  
check at a glance and change the current settings of the each items.  
Example: DVD video disc  
1 Direct title/track skip  
1/5  
1‰/3‰  
‰1:‰9:33  
2 ENGLISH  
XX  
T
C
2 Direct chapter skip  
3 Direct time skip  
4 Subtitle  
BIT RATE indicates the amount  
of data that is being transferred  
to the recorder per second.  
However, note that picture  
quality is not always in  
DVD  
5 Angle  
6 Audio  
D
1
2ch  
proportion to the bit rate.  
5
10  
7
DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND  
BIT RATE 0  
Mbps  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SELECT  
G
S
8 DIGITAL GAMMA  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
9
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE  
Currently selected item  
1
Direct title/track skip (P.41)  
6
Audio setting (P.42)  
• The number of the title/track (max. 99) currently played  
back is displayed.  
You can skip directly to the desired title/track.  
• When a disc with no title is played back, XX is displayed.  
• The type of audio currently selected is displayed.  
You can select the desired type of audio.  
7
DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND setting (P.43)  
• This function provides rich surround sound by stereo (2-  
channel audio) or TV.  
You can toggle the setting between “ON” and “OFF”.  
2
Direct chapter skip (P.41)  
• The number of the chapter (max.999) currently played  
back is displayed.  
You can skip directly to the desired chapter.  
• When a disc with no chapter is played back, XX is  
displayed.  
8
DIGITAL GAMMA setting (P.43)  
You can make the entire image easier to see by brighten-  
ing the darker and obscure portions.  
You can toggle the setting between “AUTO”, “ON” and  
“OFF”, and change the level.  
• This function does not work when “PROGRESSIVE” in  
“PLAYBACK SETUP” to “ON”.  
3
Direct time skip (P.41)  
• Elapsed time from the beginning of the disc is displayed.  
• DVD discs ..... Displays the elapsed time of the title.  
CD ................. Displays the elapsed time of the track.  
9
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE setting (P.43)  
4
Subtitle setting (P.42)  
• This function enhances the fine detail of the image and  
outlines of the objects it contains by reducing the amount  
of picture noise.  
You can toggle the setting between “ON” and “OFF” and  
change the level.  
You can select the desired subtitle language if the disc  
has a number of different subtitle languages.  
• The subtitle number and language currently selected are  
displayed. (When a disc with no subtitle is played back,  
xx is displayed.)  
• This function does not work when “PROGRESSIVE” in  
“PLAYBACK SETUP” to “ON”.  
5
Angle setting (P.42)  
You can select the desired angle if the disc has a number  
of different angles.  
• The current angle is displayed. (When a disc with only  
one angle is played back, XX is displayed.)  
NOTE  
• If the function control screen is displayed during playback of a DVD video disc, it may not be possible to perform the  
operations instructed by the DVD video disc. If this happens, perform the instructed operations after canceling the  
function control screen.  
40  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
40  
03.1.14, 9:27 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Control  
5 Press SETUP/FUNCTION or  
RETURN to return to normal  
playback screen.  
Direct Skip  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
(title/chapter/track)  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
CH  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
AUDIO CD  
NOTE  
TITLE  
Use the following procedure to perform the  
Direct title [track] skip or Direct chapter skip.  
• On some discs, this function is disabled.  
• This function does not work during  
programmed playback.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION during  
TIMER PROG.  
playback.  
Direct Time Skip  
REC MODE  
• The Function control screen appears.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
100  
1/5  
T
C
AUDIO CD  
DVD  
1‰/3‰  
‰1:‰9:33  
2 ENGLISH  
XX  
REV  
FWD  
You can play back from an intermediate  
location of a title or chapter by specifying the  
time.  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
D
1
2ch  
5
10  
BIT RATE 0  
Mbps  
STOP  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SELECT  
G
S
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SLOW  
EDIT  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION during  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
playback.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
2 Press ' / " to select  
and  
• The Function control screen appears.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press ' / " to select  
and then  
Example: Direct title skip  
press SET/ENTER.  
/5  
T
C
DVD  
3 Press ' / " to set “hour” and  
then press |.  
• Set “minutes” and “seconds” in the  
same way.  
• If you enter the wrong number, press  
\ to return to the previous digit.  
• Number buttons can be used instead  
of ' / " to set.  
5
10  
Mbps  
BIT RATE 0  
G
S
SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3 Press ' / " to input the title  
number to which you want to  
• Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
skip.  
You can also number buttons to input  
the title number.  
• Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
T
C
DVD  
‰1:‰9:33  
Example: Entering title 5  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The played back starts from the  
specified time.  
5/5  
T
C
DVD  
You can intend to go on and specify  
other settings.  
5
10  
BIT RATE 0  
Mbps  
G
S
SELECT  
5 Press SETUP/FUNCTION or  
RETURN to return to the normal  
playback screen.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
setting.  
NOTE  
• The played back image changes to  
the beginning of the specified title.  
You can go on to specify other  
settings.  
• On Video CDs or Audio CDs, direct time  
skip can be set within the same track.  
On some discs, direct time skip is prohibited.  
• This function does not work during  
programmed playback.  
41  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
41  
03.1.14, 9:27 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Control  
NOTE  
Subtitle/Angle/  
Audio Setting  
DVD VIDEO  
About the subtitle setting  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
• When setting the subtitle language, you  
can also toggle the setting between “ON”  
and “OFF” by pressing \ / |.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
Use the following procedure to perform the  
Subtitle language, Angle or Audio setting.  
TITLE  
About the Audio setting  
• With certain types of discs, you can  
change the audio using the disc menu.  
• About the audio settings, see page 36 for  
details.  
• On Video CDs and Audio CDs, audio is  
changed as follow:  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION during  
+
VCR PLUS  
playback.  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
• The Function control screen appears.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
1/5  
T
C
100  
L
R
L+R  
DVD  
1‰/3‰  
‰1:‰9:33  
2 ENGLISH  
XX  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
• A DTS digital surround decoder is required  
to listen to DTS audio. (When use a DTS  
digital surround decoder, press AUDIO to  
select “DTS”.)  
D
1
2ch  
5
10  
BIT RATE 0  
Mbps  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
ON  
ON  
ON  
STOP  
G
S
SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
Audio  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Angle  
Subtitle  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press ' / " to select  
then press SET/ENTER.  
and  
Example: Subtitle language setting  
T
C
DVD  
2 ENGLISH  
5
10  
Mbps  
BIT RATE 0  
G
S
SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3 Press ' / " to select the subtitle  
language you want to choose.  
• Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
4 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
setting.  
You can go on to specify other  
settings.  
5 Press SETUP/FUNCTION or  
RETURN to return to the normal  
playback screen.  
42  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
42  
03.1.14, 9:28 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Control  
DIGITAL GAMMA  
Clearer Picture and  
DIGITAL GAMMA is a digital image quality enhancement  
function that gives a richer image by brightening the darker  
and more obscure portions of the image without altering the  
brightness of the brighter portions, thereby making the  
entire image easier to see.  
Dynamic Sound Setting  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND  
This function allows you to enjoy a surround sound”  
effect when you are using an analog connection to 2-  
channel audio equipment (TV, etc.).  
NOTE  
Three digital GAMMA level settings are available.  
When setting is AUTO, GAMMA level is set  
automatically depending on the brightness of the image.  
This function does not work during progressive playback.  
The Dolby Virtual Surround feature is activated in the  
following cases even if digital equipment is connected.  
When playing back the linear PCM audio of a DVD  
video disc.  
When Dolby digital audio is played back when “  
Digital OUThas been set to PCM(See page 81).  
The Dolby Virtual Surround feature of this recorder  
employs the Spatializer system*.  
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE  
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE is a digital image quality  
enhancement function that gives a clearer image by  
sharpening the details and outlines in the image and  
reducing the amount of picture noise.  
* Certain audio features of this product manufactured under  
a license from Desper Products, Inc. Spatializer® N-2-2™  
and the circle-in-square device are trademarks owned by  
Desper Products, Inc.  
NOTE  
Three DIGTAL SUPER PICTURE level settings are  
available.  
There is no Autosetting.  
NOTE  
When a monaural audio recording is played back with the  
Dolby Virtual Surround feature ON, the sound level may  
be low and it may be difficult to hear. When this happens,  
turn the Dolby Virtual Surround feature OFF.  
The Dolby Virtual Surround feature does not function in  
the following cases:  
This function does not work during progressive playback.  
When the Dolby Digital output level is set to OFF.  
During TV broadcasts and external input  
When playing back a Video CD or Audio CD  
When playing back discs or audio recordings for which  
the Dolby Virtual Surround features does not function, the  
Dolby Virtual Surround feature is automatically switched  
to OFF.  
There is no Autosetting.  
There is no level setting.  
43  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
43  
03.1.9, 7:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Control  
DOLBY VIRTUAL  
SURROUND/DIGITAL  
GAMMA/DIGITAL  
SUPER PICTURE  
setting  
6 Press SETUP/FUNCTION or  
RETURN to return to the normal  
playback screen.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
+
VCR PLUS  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Use the following procedure to perform the  
DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND, DIGITAL  
GAMMA or DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE setting  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
Example: Setting “DIGITAL GAMMA”  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION during  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
playback.  
STOP  
• The Function control screen appears.  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
1/5  
T
C
DVD  
1‰/3‰  
‰1:‰9:33  
2 ENGLISH  
XX  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
D
1
2ch  
5
10  
BIT RATE 0  
Mbps  
ON  
ON  
ON  
G
S
SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
DIGITAL SUPER PICTURE  
DIGITAL GAMMA  
S
G
DOLBY VIRTUAL  
SURROUND  
2 Press '/ "to select  
and  
then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/ " to select “ON”.  
• Each time the button is pressed, the  
mode changes in the following  
sequence:  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
4 While the “  
ON” is displayed,  
press \/ | to select the level.  
• The level selection indicator that  
shows the current level appears.  
5
10  
Mbps  
BIT RATE 0  
ENTER  
G
S
SELECT  
ON  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
5 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
setting.  
You can go on to specify other  
setings.  
44  
DV_RW2U#p37-44.p65  
44  
03.1.14, 9:28 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Selection of Scenes  
Selecting Scenes by  
Title Number  
Disc Menu Screen  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD VIDEO  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
Example: Selecting “LANGUAGE”  
DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO MODE  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
1 Press MENU to display disc  
TITLE  
NOTE  
menu screen.  
• This function only work on the finalized  
DVD-R or DVD-RW (Video mode).  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
MENU  
+
VCR PLUS  
1 Press TITLE to show the title  
TIMER PROG.  
screen.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
2 Press ' / " to select  
100  
T I T L E M E N U  
“LANGUAGE”.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
1
3
2
4
C
D
a
ts  
F i  
s
r
hes  
MENU  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
1
2
3
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
LANGUAGE  
STOP  
og  
s
B
i
ds  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
2 Press \ / | to select the desired  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
3 Press SET/ENTER to display  
title.  
TV CONTROL  
language screen.  
3 When you press SET/ENTER,  
the title specified in step 2 starts  
playing.  
4 Press ' / " to select language.  
LANGUAGE  
1
2
3
English  
Français  
Español  
NOTE  
• The above procedure indicates the  
standard operating procedure. Since the  
procedure may be different depending on  
the DVD video disc, follow the procedure  
indicated in the users manual provided  
with the DVD video disc or displayed on  
the screen.  
5 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
setting.  
NOTE  
• The above procedure indicates the  
standard operating procedure. Since the  
procedure may be different depending on  
the DVD video disc, follow the procedure  
indicated in the users manual provided  
with the DVD video disc or displayed on  
the screen.  
About theTitle Menu  
• There are some DVD video discs that use  
the word “Top Menu” when explaining the  
title menu. In these explanations, the button  
referred to as the “Top Menu” is equivalent  
to the TITLE on this recorder.  
• The Title screen will not be displayed when  
pressing TITLE if no titles are recorded on  
the disc.  
45  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
45  
03.1.9, 7:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording for DVD Discs  
NOTE  
Before Recording  
Recorded materials must be finalized  
(page 88) in order to be viewed with  
another DVD player.  
Materials recorded in the VR mode and the  
Video mode cannot be contained on the  
same disc.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
Recordable Discs  
DVD-RW Discs  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
DVD-RW discs make it possible to  
repeatedly make about 1,000 recordings of  
high-quality sound and pictures attainable.  
There are two types of DVD-RW discs  
consisting of Ver. 1.1 and Ver. 1.1 (CPRM).  
These discs can be recorded while  
selecting the preferred mode from two  
different recording formats (VR mode or  
Video mode).  
TITLE  
MENU  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
Before Starting  
Recording  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
Refer to About Recordingon page 9 for  
100  
information on recording.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
DVD-R Discs  
NOTE  
4.7  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
DVD-R discs are able to record the high  
quality pictures only once.  
DVD recorders perform high-precision  
recording. Pay attention to the following  
matters so that data is recorded accurately  
on the disc.  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
DVD-R discs can only be recorded in the  
Video mode.  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Do not subject the recorder to impacts.  
Do not use the recorder in unstable  
locations or locations subject to vibrations.  
Do not unplug the recorder during  
recording, writing of data, editing,  
initialization, finalizing or any other  
occasions when the recorder is operating.  
Unplug the recorder only after turning the  
power OFF. Furthermore, the  
manufacturer is not responsible for  
compensation for the contents of data in  
the case data has been lost or was not  
recorded.  
Titles for which recording has been  
interrupted due to a scratched disc, soiled  
disc or other reason are displayed with an  
exclamation point !in front of the title  
displayed on the DiscNavi menu and so  
forth.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
NOTE  
When using DVD-RW discs in the Video  
mode, record these discs after first  
initializing the disc in the Video mode. For  
further details, read the section on VIDEO  
MODE INITIALIZE(page 88) of Disc  
Setup.  
When recording onto DVD-RW or DVD-R  
discs, it takes a while until recording  
begins (about 2 seconds for DVD-RW discs  
and about 10 seconds for DVD-R discs).  
Make sure to press ÆREC earlier when  
recording onto DVD-RW or DVD-R discs.  
TV CONTROL  
About the Recording  
Format  
VR mode:  
When you want to edit  
recorded material  
* CD-R and CD-RW discs cannot be  
recorded with this recorder.  
Video mode:When you want to enjoy  
recorded material with  
another DVD player  
(playback with all DVD  
players is not guaranteed)  
Initialization  
DVD-RW discs must be initialized (formatted)  
before using for recording. (Since DVD-R  
discs are not required to be initialized, they  
can immediately be recorded in the Video  
mode.)  
DVD-RW discs that have been  
recorded in the VR mode can  
be played back with DVD  
recorders indicated as being  
RW COMPATIBLE.  
Initializing in the VR Mode  
When an unused disc is loaded onto the  
recorder, it is automatically initialized in the  
VR mode.  
46  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
46  
03.1.9, 7:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording for DVD Discs  
• Although the number of chapters that can  
be created on a single disc varies  
Initializing in the Video Mode  
When a disc that has been initialized in the  
VR mode is used in the Video mode, select  
initializing in the Video mode in Disc Setup of  
the Initial Setup menu.  
• The setting can be changed so that  
unused discs are automatically initialized in  
the Video mode when loaded onto the  
recorder (page 86).  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
according to available memory space, it is  
generally around 200 chapters. However,  
only up to 50 unerasable chapter marks  
(chapter marks that are automatically  
created when a part has been added or  
erased) can be created on a single disc.  
• When an unrecordable disc has been  
loaded onto the recorder, the remaining  
recording time is displayed as “0h00m”  
and blinking. In addition, the remaining  
recording time is displayed as “0:00” and  
blinking when the on-screen display is set  
to “ON”.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Recording Formats  
and Recording Modes  
The recording modes that can be set differ  
depending on the recording format (VR mode  
or Video mode).  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
Confirmation of  
Available Disc Space  
• Confirm remaining recording time by  
setting the on-screen display to “ON”.  
• When the remaining recording time is  
“0:00” (when blinking), no further material  
can be recorded on that disc. Replace the  
disc with a different recording disc.  
Recording  
format  
Recording mode  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
FINE  
About  
SP  
LP  
EP  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
About  
About  
About  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
VR mode  
Recording  
time  
60 min.  
(About  
90 min.)  
About  
120 min.  
(About  
240 min.  
(About  
300 min.)  
About  
360 min.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
180 min.)  
About  
TV CONTROL  
Video  
mode  
60 min.  
(About  
90 min.)  
120 min.  
(About  
240 min.  
Recording  
time  
180 min.)  
• Recording time is based on the recording  
time when using a 4.7 GB disc.  
03 VR  
--:--:--  
REM 1:59SP  
ORG  
DVD-RW  
02  
• Values for recording time shown in  
parentheses ( ) provide a general  
indication of recording time when timer  
recording has been made with “EXACT  
REC” set to “ON”.  
• Remaining recording time can also be  
confirmed by pressing DISPLAY on the  
remote control during recording. The  
display changes in the order shown below  
each time it is pressed.  
Disc Information  
T--C---  
Channel  
Counter  
Remain Time  
TYPE  
TITLE  
CHAPTER:019  
:DVD-VIDEO  
:05  
Operation Status  
REMAIN: 1h57m  
SP  
• The disc remaining recording time display  
serves as a general indicator of the amount  
of available space on the disc. Available  
space may still be remaining on the disc  
when recording is completed. (The display  
of remaining recording time during  
DISC  
:OFF PROTECT:OFF  
NOT FINALIZE  
Disc information provides you with the  
remaining time on the disc, titles that have  
been recorded and other information. It is  
recommended to check disc information  
before recording.  
recording and that of when recording is  
completed may not always be identical.)  
• Disc information can be displayed while  
the disc is stopped by pressing ON  
SCREEN (page 28).  
• Up to 99 original titles and Playlist titles  
each can be created on VR mode discs.  
Up to 99 titles can be created on Video  
mode discs.  
47  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
47  
03.1.14, 9:30 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                              
Æ
                                                                              
REC again to start recording.  
TV Program Recording  
When recording TV programs, an once  
• Each time REC MODE is pressed, the  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
recording (from the start of recording until  
recording stops) is recorded as a single  
“title”.  
mode changes as follows:  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
VR mode:  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
FINE SP LP EP  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
Basic Recording  
Video mode:  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
FINE SP LP  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
+
VCR PLUS  
1 Turn on the TV and switch the TV  
channel to the external “VIDEO”  
or “AV” channel connected to the  
VIDEO/AUDIO output jacks.  
TIMER PROG.  
8 Press ÆREC.  
REC MODE  
DVD-RW:  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
Recording starts immediately.  
• The recording indicator on the Front  
Panel Display lights up.  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
2 Press POWER. The recorder is  
REC  
DVD-R:  
STILL/PAUSE  
turned on.  
STOP  
The recorder prepares to start recording  
when setting “R REC START” in  
“RECORD SETUP” to “2 PRESS”. Press  
3 Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
disc tray.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
4 Load the disc onto the tray.  
• Hold the disc without touching either  
of its surfaces, position it with the  
printed title side facing up.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
• Recording continues until you press  
ISTOP or the disc is full.  
• If you prefer DVD-R recording to work  
in the same way as recording to DVD-  
RW, set “R REC START” in “RECORD  
SETUP” to “1 PRESS”.  
TV CONTROL  
Important!  
• When you record SAP broadcast, setting  
“SAP” in “RECORD SETUP” to “ON” (See  
page 87).  
5 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the  
disc tray.  
• When the disc is being identified  
(“LOAD” is displayed on the Front  
Panel Display), the DISC IN indicator  
on the Front Panel is blinking. The  
indicator lights when the disc is  
finished being identified (“LOAD”  
disappears).  
• If you load a completely blank disc,  
the recorder takes a short while to  
initialize the disc. (It takes around 60  
to 90 seconds.)  
6 Press CH ' / " to select the TV  
channel to record.  
• Check whether the channel is set to  
the channel you want to record on the  
TV screen.  
7 Press REC MODE to select the  
recording mode.  
• Current mode is displayed on the TV  
screen and Front Panel Display.  
48  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
48  
03.1.10, 10:06 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Program Recording  
Pause Recording  
NOTE  
Recorded images may not appear correctly  
on the screen when viewing broadcasts  
with poor reception. This may be improved  
by resetting 3D Y/Cto OFF(page 91).  
Discs edited with another recorder that  
contain more than 201 chapter marks  
cannot be edited (or recorded) with this  
recorder.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
1 Press STILL/PAUSE during  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
recording.  
This function does not work during  
timer recording and Simple  
Recording Timer.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
Discs on which parts have been added or  
erased more than 51 times for a single title  
with another DVD recorder, and discs that  
are protected cannot be edited (or  
recorded).  
Although the channel can be  
changed while recording is paused,  
the recorded title does not change.  
(The name of the title is the same as  
that of the previous channel.)  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
Titles for which recording has been  
interrupted due to a scratched disc, soiled  
disc or other reason are displayed with an  
exclamation point !in front of the title  
displayed on the DiscNavi menu and so  
forth.  
PLAY  
2 Press STILL/PAUSE or ÆREC  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
to start recording again.  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
NOTE  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
In the case of a VR mode disc, a chapter  
mark is automatically inserted at the  
location where recording is paused.  
When recording onto a DVD-RW disc, the  
channel cannot be changed if recording is  
paused by pressing STILL/PAUSE  
immediately after having pressed ÆREC.  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
EDIT  
When Recording Discs are Scratched or  
Soiled  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
Recording may be temporarily interrupted  
at those portions of a disc that cannot be  
recorded as a result of being scratched or  
soiled. When recording is resumed, the  
portion where recording starts is recorded  
as a different title. When a disc is unable to  
be recorded, INCORRECT TYPE.  
REMOVE DISC.will appear and all other  
functions of the recorder will be disabled  
except for opening and closing of the tray.  
Take out the disc when this happens.  
When recording in the Video mode, a  
maximum of about 60 seconds of recorded  
material prior to the point where recording  
is interrupted may be lost.  
TV CONTROL  
49  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
49  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV Program Recording  
Stop Recording  
Useful Recording  
Functions  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
I Watching OtherTV Programs while  
Recording  
Press ISTOP during recording.  
Stop recording before you remove the  
disc from the recorder,  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
The TV channel can be changed by  
pressing the channel button on the TV. The  
TV can also be turned off.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
NOTE  
+
VCR PLUS  
I Accurately Starting Recording from a  
Desired Part  
Since images are recorded in 30 second  
units in the Video mode (1 minute units in  
the LP mode), images may be briefly  
recorded after recording has been  
stopped. In this case, if recording is  
stopped after first pausing the recording, a  
black screen will be recorded for up to 30  
seconds (or up to 1 minute in the LP  
mode).  
TIMER PROG.  
When recording onto a DVD-RW or DVD-R  
disc, a brief amount of time is required until  
recording begins (about 2 seconds for  
DVD-RW discs and about 10 seconds for  
DVD-R discs). Start recording using the  
following procedure when you want to start  
recording at a precise time.  
Æ When recording onto a DVD-RW disc:  
Press STILL/PAUSE Immediately  
after earlier pressing ÆREC to pause  
recording, and then once the record-  
ing reaches the scene you want to  
record, press ÆREC to start recording  
from that scene.  
ISTOP does not function while  
recording is paused. If you want to  
stop recording, press ISTOP after  
waiting at least 5 seconds after  
recording has started.  
Æ When recording onto a DVD-R disc:  
Set the R REC STARTsetting of the  
RECORD SETUPto 2 PRESS.  
Recording is paused for about 10  
seconds later after ÆREC is pressed  
once. When ÆREC is pressed for a  
second time while recording is  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
A black screen may be recorded at the end  
of a recording when a recording in the VR  
mode is stopped after pausing.  
SLOW  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
EDIT  
PLAY LIST  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
Erase recorded titles when they are no  
longer required (page 71). In the case of a  
disc recorded in the VR mode, remaining  
recording time increases by the amount of  
original titles erased. In the case of discs  
recorded in the Video mode, although titles  
are no longer displayed, remaining  
recording time does not increase. (In the  
case of DVD-RW discs, remaining  
recording time only increases when the last  
title has been erased.)  
TV CONTROL  
ISTOP does not function for the first 5  
seconds of a recording. (Press ISTOP 5 or  
more seconds after recording begins.)  
paused, you can accurately start  
recording from the scene you want to  
record.  
If R REC STARTof the RECORD  
SETUPis set to 1 PRESS, recording  
starts automatically about 10 seconds  
later after ÆREC is pressed (the  
Pause function does not function).  
50  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
50  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simple RecordingTimer  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
Changing the Settings of  
the Simple Recording  
Timer  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
The Simple Recording Timer (SRT) enables  
you to set the recording stop time. The SRT  
can be set on the TV screen by using the  
remote control.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
1 Press ÆREC. The stop time is  
SET/  
blinking on the TV screen.  
RETURN  
ENTER  
Important!  
The SRT cannot be set if the clock has not  
been set. Make sure the clock is set  
before setting the SRT.  
+
VCR PLUS  
2 Press ÆREC to change the stop  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
time as desired.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
1 Perform the steps 1 to 8 of “Basic  
Cancelling the Simple  
Recording Timer  
100  
Recording” on page 48.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
2 Press ÆREC during recording.  
• Each press of ÆREC increases the  
stop time by 10 minutes.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
Press ËSTOP.  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
NOTE  
SLOW  
EDIT  
Example: Stop the recording at 9:40 AM.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
The Simple Recording Timer has priority  
over other recordings.  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
• Ordinary timer programs will not be  
recorded when portions of the time setting  
of the simple recording timer and of the  
time setting of the ordinary timer recording  
overlap.  
STOP 9:40  
AM  
TV CONTROL  
• When the stop time comes, recording  
is finished, and the power turns off.  
Example:  
NOT  
Record-  
ed  
Ordinary timer recording  
(9:30 AM to 10:30 AM)  
recorded  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
12:00  
Recorded  
Simple Recording Timer  
(9:00 AM to 10:00 AM)  
51  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
51  
03.1.14, 9:31 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording withVCR Plus+® System  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
3 Press number buttons to enter  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER ON/OFF  
“PLUSCODE NO.” and then press  
The VCR Plus+ Programming System allows  
you to program your recorder for timer  
recording simply by inputting the PlusCode  
Programming number.  
The PlusCode numbers are listed in most  
newspaper, television guides, and local CATV  
listings. Simply by inputting this PlusCode  
number, you can program your recorder for  
timer recording, eliminating the need to input  
program start time, stop time, channel, date  
and other information necessary for timer  
recording.  
".  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
• If you make a mistake in entering the  
numbers, press ERASE to erase the  
numbers one by one or press \ / | to  
move the cursor, then re-enter the  
correct number.  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
TIMER PROGRAM  
REC MODE  
PLUSCODE NO.  
1234  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
ONCE  
WEEKLY DAILY  
100  
REMAIN: 1h11m  
FINE  
REV  
FWD  
Up to 8 timer programs can be stored in the  
recorder.  
PLAY  
SELECT :  
CHANGE:  
RETURN:  
ENTER  
:
ENTER  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1 Press POWER and load a  
4 Press \ / | to select “ONCE”,  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
recordable disc.  
“WEEKLY” or “DAILY” and then  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
• Timer recording does not work during  
loading a disc. Start the timer setting  
after the disc is finished being  
identified.  
press SET/ENTER.  
• ONCE: To record only once.  
• WEEKLY: To record every week at the  
same time.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
• DAILY: To record everyday at the  
same time.  
Important!  
• Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
• When you record SAP broadcast, setting  
“SAP” in “RECORD SETUP” to “ON” (See  
page 87).  
5 The timer program information is  
shown on the TV screen. Check  
the contents.  
• If you want to change any settings,  
press \ / | to select items and press  
' / " to correct.  
• When recording a program on a  
channel for the first time, you must  
enter the correct channel number on  
the screen, other wise the PlusCode  
number will not be successfully  
decoded.  
• When you press ISTOP to stop timer  
recording, the timer standby mode will be  
canceled. Press TIMER ON/OFF to enter  
the timer standby mode if you set other  
timer recordings. The TIMER indicator  
lights up.  
2 Press VCR PLUS+ to display the  
TIMER PROGRAM  
1/2  
DATE  
1/08  
CH  
06  
START STOP  
VCR PLUS+ setting screen.  
• If you press VCR PLUS+ when the  
clock has not been set, the clock  
setting screen will appear.  
9:00  
PM  
9:30SP  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
REMAIN: 1h11m  
PLEASE CHECK CHANNEL  
FINE  
SELECT :  
ENTER  
CHANGE:  
RETURN:  
TIMER PROGRAM  
:
ENTER  
PLUSCODE NO.  
-
6 Press SET/ENTER. The VCR  
PLUS+ setting screen will appears.  
To program additional timer  
ONCE  
WEEKLY DAILY  
REMAIN: 1h11m  
FINE  
USE NUMBER KEYS  
SELECT :  
ENTER  
:
ENTER  
RETURN:  
settings, repeat steps 3 to 6.  
52  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
52  
03.1.14, 9:32 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording with VCR Plus+® System  
7 Press RETURN to return to the  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
normal screen.  
The display appears shown below.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON  
FOR TIMER RECORDING.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
8 Press TIMER ON/OFF to enter  
100  
the timer standby mode.  
REV  
FWD  
TIMER indicator on the front of the  
recorder will light up.  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
Timer recording will not work if the  
recorder is left on.  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
NOTE  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
If you select DAILYin step 4, the recorder  
will record the program Monday-Sunday at  
the same time.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
If you want to record Monday-Friday or  
Monday-Saturday, select DATEwith \ / |  
and change it to MO-FRor MO-SAwith  
' / " in step 5.  
In step 5, input the channel number you  
want to record. Once the preset channel  
has been input, you will not need to set the  
preset channel for that station again.  
In step 4, if the recorder cannot decode the  
PlusCode number, or if the combination of  
PlusCode number and Program mode does  
not exist, then ERRORwill appear. To  
correct, press ERASE and re-enter the  
PlusCode number.  
The following causes are possible when the  
TIMER indicator is blinking or ERRORis  
displayed when TIMER ON/OFF has been  
pressed.  
A recording has been programmed  
having a recording time of 1 minute  
Inadequate available disc space  
The disc is protected  
No disc is loaded in the recorder  
Disc identification is not finished  
Repeat the procedure after checking the  
recording time and disc.  
Checking/Cancelling the VCR  
Plus+ Programming System  
Use the procedure described in Confirming/  
Cancelling Timer Programto confirm or  
cancel program data (See page 59).  
53  
DV_RW2U#p45-53.p65  
53  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
4 Press ' / " to select the desired  
month/day (DATE) and then press  
|. The cursor will move to the  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TIMER  
DISC  
ON/OFF TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
POWER  
Important!  
• Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
• When you record SAP broadcast, setting  
“SAP” in “RECORD SETUP” to “ON” (See  
page 87).  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
next column.  
Example: August 10th  
• If you want to record every day or  
week at the same time, hold when  
you select the date.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
• When you press ISTOP to stop timer  
recording, the timer standby mode will be  
canceled. Press TIMER ON/OFF to enter  
the timer standby mode if you set other  
timer recordings. The TIMER indicator  
lights up.  
When pressing: The recording date changes in this sequence:  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
8/10 MO-FR MO-SA DAILY SAT SUN 8/9 8/8  
(next year)  
8/10  
8/11  
8/12 8/8 8/9 SUN SAT  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
(present) (tomorrow)  
(next year)  
100  
REV  
FWD  
TIMER PROGRAM  
1/2  
PLAY  
DATE  
CH  
8/10 ---  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
START STOP  
NOTE  
--:-- --:--  
FINE  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
• Up to 8 timer programs can be stored in  
the recorder.  
• “DV” cannot be set for the channel  
reserved for timer recording.  
• When “0h00m” is blinking as the remaining  
recording time in the disc information after  
disc identification, the disc loaded cannot  
be used for recording. Replace it with a  
different disc.  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
REMAIN: 1h11m  
FINE  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
SELECT :  
CHANGE:  
RETURN:  
ENTER  
:
ENTER  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
5 Press ' / " to select the desired  
channel and then press |.  
• Set the duration of recording time to at  
least 2 minutes. Recordings of 1 minute  
cannot be programmed.  
6 Press ' / " to set the recording  
start time (hour digits and minute  
digits) and then press |.  
Press AM/PM to select AMor PM.  
Example: Recording a TV program in the FINE  
mode: the TV program is on channel  
7 starting at 9:05 PM and stopping  
at 10:35 PM on August 10th.  
7 Press ' / " to set the recording  
stop time and then press |.  
It is not necessary to select AM or PM.  
1 Turn on the recorder and load a  
8 Press ' / " to select the recording  
recordable disc.  
mode.  
• Timer recording does not work during  
loading a disc. Start the timer setting  
after the disc is finished being  
identified.  
Example: SP  
TIMER PROGRAM  
1/2  
DATE  
8/10  
CH  
07  
START STOP  
9:05  
PM  
10:35SP  
2 Press TIMER PROG. to display  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
the TIMER PROGRAM screen.  
• If you press TIMER PROG. when the  
clock has not been set, the clock  
setting screen will appear.  
REMAIN: 1h11m  
FINE  
SELECT :  
CHANGE:  
RETURN:  
ENTER  
:
ENTER  
TIMER PROGRAM  
CH START STOP  
1/2  
DATE  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
2/2 REMAIN: 1h11m  
FINE  
CLEAR  
SELECT :  
ENTER  
:
C
:
ENTER  
RETURN:  
3 Press SET/ENTER to set the  
timer program.  
54  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
54  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
9 Press SET/ENTER.  
To program additional timer settings,  
press SET/ENTER and repeat steps  
39.  
TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
DISC  
ON/OFF TIMER  
POWER  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
10 Press RETURN to finish  
TITLE  
settings.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
11 Press TIMER ON/OFF to enter  
+
VCR PLUS  
the timer standby mode.  
• The power turns off, and the recorder  
enters the timer standby mode (the  
TIMER indicator on the recorder lights  
up).  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
• During playback, the power does not  
turn off, but the timer recording will be  
set.  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
NOTE  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
• If the power is interrupted for more than  
1 hour (power failure, etc.) during timer  
recording, the Auto Clock Setting will reset  
the time after the power is returned (the  
timer indicator on the Front Panel Display  
will blink.) but the timer settings will be  
canceled.  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
• Number buttons can be used instead of  
' / " to set the data.  
To stop timer recording, press ËSTOP.  
• If a button is not pressed within 3 minutes  
during the setting procedure, the screen  
will return to the normal screen.  
There are two timer setting screens (1/2, 2/2).  
• The following causes are possible when the  
TIMER indicator is blinking or “ERROR” is  
displayed when TIMER ON/OFF has been  
pressed.  
• A recording has been programmed  
having a recording time of 1 minute  
• Inadequate available disc space  
• The disc is protected  
• No disc is loaded in the recorder  
• Disc identification is not finished  
Repeat the procedure after checking the  
recording time and disc.  
55  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
55  
03.1.14, 9:33 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DiscTimer Recording  
NOTE  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
TIMER DISC  
OPEN/  
DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs initialized  
in the Video mode cannot be used for disc  
timer recording.  
Disc timer recording and standard timer  
recording cannot be performed  
simultaneously.  
If disc timer recording is set for a disc that  
has not been programmed for disc timer  
recording, the recorder will not enter the  
disc timer recording mode until the disc  
has finished being identified.  
In the case of loading a disc in this  
recorder for which the disc timer recording  
has been programmed with another  
recorder, check the contents of the  
recording have been programmed since  
this recorder has four types of recording  
modes.  
POWER ON/OFF  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
Disc timer recording is a function that lets  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
you record programming information  
directly onto a disc. Since programming  
information is recorded onto the disc itself,  
recording is programmed simply by  
placing the disc in the recorder. It is useful  
when recording a particular program either  
every week or every day.  
A single disc can be programmed with up  
to 8 timer recordings, including daily and  
weekly programming.  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
When programming recording information  
directly on a disc, use a DVD-RW disc that  
has been initialized in the VR mode.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1 Press POWER and then load a  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
DVD-RW disc.  
When 0h00mis blinking as the remaining  
recording time in the disc information after  
disc identification, the disc loaded cannot  
be used for recording. Replace it with a  
different disc.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Timer recording does not work during  
loading a disc. Start the timer setting  
after the disc is finished being  
identified.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press and hold DISC TIMER for  
more than 2 seconds.  
The DISC TIMER indicator on the  
recorder lights up and the recorder  
enters the Disc Timer Recording  
mode.  
If a disc that has already been  
programmed disc timer recording is  
loaded, the recorder enters the Disc  
Timer Recording mode automatically.  
3 Set the timer recording. (See  
“Timer Recording” on page 54 or  
“Timer Recording withVCR  
Plus+® System” on page 52.)  
If a disc that has already been  
programmed disc timer recording is  
loaded, go to step 4.  
4 Press TIMER ON/OFF.  
The recorder is turned off and the  
TIMER indicator on the recorder lights  
up (Timer standby mode).  
Make sure to check both the TIMER  
indicator and the DISC TIMER  
indicator light up.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
56  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
56  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Timer Recording  
NOTE  
Canceling the Disc Timer  
Recording  
Follow the procedure shown below when you  
want to cancel disc timer recording and use  
standard timer recording. (Disc timer  
recording is not canceled even after the  
recording program has ended.)  
I When a disc containing a disc timer  
recording program is set in the recorder  
and is ready for recording (the DISC  
TIMER indicator andTIMER indicator are  
lit)  
TIMER DISC  
ON/OFF TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
The following causes are possible when the  
TIMER indicator is blinking or ERRORis  
displayed when TIMER ON/OFF has been  
pressed.  
A recording has been programmed  
having a recording time of 1 minute  
Inadequate available disc space  
The disc is protected  
No disc is loaded in the recorder  
Disc identification is not finished  
Repeat the procedure after checking the  
recording time and disc.  
POWER  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
Disc timer recording and standard timer  
recording cannot be performed  
simultaneously.  
Disc timer recording is canceled when the  
disc is removed.  
REV  
FWD  
1 Press TIMER ON/OFF.  
PLAY  
The TIMER indicator turns off.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
2 Turn on the power.  
3 Cancel the disc timer recording.  
Refer to page 59 for how to cancel  
the disc timer recording.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Important!  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
Recordings cannot be programmed when  
the power is turned off or when a VR  
mode DVD-RW disc is not set in the  
recorder.  
TV CONTROL  
4 Press and hold DISC TIMER for  
at least 2 seconds.  
When you want to use standard timer  
recording with a disc containing a  
disc timer recording program, cancel  
disc timer recording by performing  
steps 3 and 4.  
Disc timer recording can also be  
canceled by removing the disc  
containing the disc timer recording  
program.  
I When a disc containing a disc timer  
recording program is set in the recorder  
and the recorder is in the disc timer  
recording mode (only the DISC TIMER  
indicator is lit)  
Press and hold DISC TIMER for at  
least 2 seconds.  
57  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
57  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Recorder During Timer Standby Mode  
This recorder cannot be used during timer  
TIMER  
standby. When you want to play back a disc  
DISC  
TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
POWER ON/OFF  
that is different from the disc to be used for  
timer recording, first cancel timer standby.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TITLE  
SET/  
1 Press TIMER ON/OFF.  
The TIMER indicator turns off and  
timer standby is canceled.  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
2 Press POWER.  
REC MODE  
The recorder can now be operated.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
When Finished Using  
PLAY  
the Recorder  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1 Load a disc to be used for timer  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
recording.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
Once disc identification (loading) is  
completed, press TIMER ON/OFF.  
The recorder will not enter recording  
standby unless disc identification has  
been completed.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press TIMER ON/OFF.  
The power is turned off and the  
TIMER indicator lights up to indicate  
timer standby.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
TIMER  
58  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
58  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confirming/Cancelling Timer Program  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
POWER ON/OFF  
You can see on the timer setting screen a list  
of timer programs that are already set.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
1 When the mode is timer standby  
mode, press TIMER ON/OFF to  
cancel the timer standby mode  
and then press POWER.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
2 Press TIMER PROG. to display  
the TIMER PROGRAM screen.  
All timer programs that are already  
set are displayed on the TIMER  
PROGRAM screen.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
3 If you want to cancel the data,  
select the data to be canceled  
with ' / " and then press  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
ERASE.  
See 2/2 screen also.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
TIMER PROGRAM  
CH START STOP  
8/01 125  
8/10 07  
1/2  
DATE  
12:00  
9:05  
PM  
PM  
12:30EP  
10:35SP  
-/-- ---  
-/-- ---  
--:-- --:----  
--:-- --:----  
2/2 REMAIN: 1h11m  
FINE  
CLEAR  
SELECT :  
ENTER  
:
C
:
ENTER  
RETURN:  
4 Press RETURN to return to the  
normal screen.  
During playback or recording (Timer  
recording), you cannot confirm or  
cancel the programs.  
After checking or cancelling the  
program contents, press  
TIMER ON/OFF to enter the Timer  
Standby mode if you have other timer  
recordings.  
TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON  
FOR TIMER RECORDING.  
59  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
59  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast (AV AUTO REC)  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
Recording with  
AV AUTO REC  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
When connected to a Satellite receiver, etc.  
with timer recording functions, this recorder  
can be used to automatically record the timer  
program. (Refer to the operation manual of  
the Satellite receiver, etc. for instructions on  
how to set the timer program.)  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
1 Set up the Satellite receiver, etc..  
• Set the recording timer on the  
Satellite receiver, etc. for the program  
you wish to record. (Refer to the  
operation manual of the Satellite  
receiver, etc. for instructions on how  
to set the timer program.)  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
MENU  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
Example: Use of AV AUTO REC Function  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Satellite  
2:00 AM  
Program  
Timer  
3:00 AM  
4:00 AM  
Program  
Timer  
5:00 AM  
receiver, etc.  
Set timer  
program  
2 Turn off the Satellite receiver, etc..  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
3 Load a recordable disc into the  
REV  
FWD  
DVD Recorder  
2:00 AM  
3:00 AM  
4:00 AM  
5:00 AM  
Records  
Records  
recorder.  
PLAY  
Set AV AUTO  
REC function  
timer program  
timer program  
Recording Recording Recording Recording  
begins ends begins ends  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
4 Press POWER to turn off the  
recorder.  
STOP  
Power  
OFF  
Power OFF  
Power ON  
Power ON  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
5 Press and hold REC MODE for  
more than two seconds.The AV  
AUTO REC indicator on the  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
NOTE  
• The AV AUTO REC function only operates  
when used with a Satellite receiver, etc.  
with timer recording functions.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
recorder will lights up.  
• The AV AUTO REC function will not operate  
when the Satellite receiver, etc. is  
connected to the IN 3 jacks on the rear of  
the recorder or the IN 2 jacks on the front of  
the recorder.  
• The recorder will automatically turn on  
and begin recording and then stop  
recording and turn off, according to  
the timer program setting on the  
Satellite receiver, etc..  
Connecting to a Satellite  
receiver, etc.  
To use the AV AUTO REC function, connect  
the Satellite receiver, etc. to the VIDEO/  
AUDIO IN 1 jacks on the rear of the recorder.  
The Recorder  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
L
I
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
PR  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
IN 1 jacks  
Video/Audio cable  
(Supplied)  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
Satellite receiver, etc.  
60  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
60  
03.1.14, 9:33 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcust (AV AUTO REC)  
NOTE  
To Cancel the AV AUTO  
When recording PPV (pay-per-view)  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
REC Function  
programs of satellite broadcasts, always  
make sure to set the satellite receiver, etc.  
to Record. Certain programs may not be  
able to be recorded or require additional  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
Before Recording  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
Press POWER.  
TITLE  
The recorder is turned on and the AV  
AUTO REC indicator will be turned  
off.  
charges.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
Only DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 (CPRM-compatible)  
discs in the VR mode can be used to  
record Copy-oncesatellite broadcasts,  
etc.  
Use AV AUTO REC in combination with a  
satellite broadcast receiver, etc. equipped  
with a programming function.  
Since the power of this recorder is  
switched on after the video signal from a  
satellite receiver, etc. has been received,  
the start of a program may not be  
recorded.  
When a timer recording is started during  
AV AUTO REC, since disc information is  
written at the point recording switches to  
timer recording, the start of timer recording  
is delayed by a maximum of about 1  
minute.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
REC MODE  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
AV AUTO REC  
During Recording  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
Press and hold REC MODE for more  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
than 2 seconds.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
The AV AUTO REC indicator will be  
turned off and become normal  
recording mode. Press ISTOP to  
stop recording.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
Timer recording is given priority when  
timer recording and AV AUTO REC  
times overlap.  
AV AUTO REC cannot be set while the  
simple recording timer is being set.  
In the case AV AUTO REC starts after the  
start of timer recording, the recording  
mode will be the one set with timer  
recording.  
61  
DV_RW2U#p54-61.p65  
61  
03.1.9, 7:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problems of Timer Recording  
Blinking the TIMER Indicator  
Timer recording cannot be performed in the situations shown below. Check the contents of the error and reprogram timer  
recording correctly. When an error occurs, the TIMER indicator on the recorder blinks for about 5 seconds.  
Front Panel Display  
Causes  
Solution  
Setting correctly  
• There is no disc loaded  
• Load a disc for recording, and after  
the disc has finished being identified,  
press TIMER ON/OFF to enter  
standby.  
• A non recordable disc is  
loaded  
TIMER  
indicator  
is  
• When a disc for recording has already  
been loaded in the recorder, turn on  
the power and after the disc has  
finished being identified, press TIMER  
ON/OFF to enter standby.  
• There is enough blank  
space on the disc  
blinking.  
• The disc is unplayable  
• The disc that’s loaded is  
protected  
Enter standby after either canceling the  
disc protect function or loading a different  
disc for recording in the recorder.  
• Timer Recording is full  
• Repeat timer recording after deleting  
some of the timer program.  
• Repeat timer recording after setting  
the clock.  
TIMER indicator  
lights up.  
• The clock has not been  
set.  
• The channel is incorrect  
• The Recording time is set  
at 1 minute  
• Check the channel that has been  
programmed for timer recording.  
• Reset the recording time to 2 minutes  
or more.  
• Repeat timer recording after setting  
the clock.  
• Program timer recording after the  
timer recording menu or simple  
recording menu has finished.  
• Repeat timer recording after deleting  
the timer program.  
Timer  
recording  
does not  
work.  
• The clock on the recorder is not set  
• Timer Recording or Simple Recording Timer has  
been set  
• Timer Recording is full  
NOTE  
• Press ISTOP when you want to discontinue recording while timer recording is in progress. Timer recording is canceled  
when ISTOP is pressed. When there are other timer programs, enter standby by pressing TIMER ON/OFF.  
• When timer programs are programmed that have the same recording starting date and time, the first timer program is  
overwritten.  
When Timer Recording Times Overlap  
Problem  
Helpful Hint  
I If two timer recording times overlap, the second timer program starts after the first  
timer program is finished.  
Example: <Recording Times set>  
<Recording actually made>  
Timer recording times overlap  
First timer program  
First timer program  
Second timer program  
Second timer program  
7:00  
8:00 8:30  
10:00  
7:00  
8:30  
10:00  
NOTE  
• When multiple timer programs have been set and the timer recording times overlap or the ending time of the first timer  
program overlaps the starting time of the second timer program, disc information is written and the second timer program  
starts after the first timer program is finished. Consequently, the start of the second timer program is delayed by a  
maximum of about 1 minute.  
62  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
62  
03.1.14, 9:34 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Disc  
Before Editing the Disc  
Editing Procedure  
This is the basic procedure when editing titles of originals  
that have been recorded in the VR mode.  
About Editing  
Recorded contents that can be edited and the editing  
procedure differ depending on the mode in which the  
contents were recorded.  
Load a disc.  
Select the desired title and  
then edit the title.  
Erasing a part from Original (See page 65).  
Inputting/Renaming the Title  
(See page 66).  
Adding Chapter Markers (See page 66).  
Navimark (See page 68).  
Æ When Recorded in VR Mode  
Editing can be performed with this recorder alone such  
as gathering your favorite parts from recorded titles to  
create your own collection of personal favorites,  
relocating parts within a specified range, or erasing  
unnecessary parts. You can also create a Playlistfrom  
original recordings, or edit original recordings directly.  
(Those materials that can be edited differ between  
original recordings and playlists.)  
Protecting the Title (See page 69).  
Erasing the Titles (See page 71).  
Original  
This is the basic procedure when editing titles that have  
been recorded in the VR mode after creating a playlist.  
Recordings generated in the same manner in which  
they were recorded are referred to as originals. An  
once recording (from starting to stopping of the  
recording) is treated as a single title.  
Playlist  
Load a disc.  
Titles created based on an original are referred to as a  
Playlist. Playlists can be recreated as many times as  
you desire.  
Making a New Playlist  
Making a Playlist from Original Title  
(See page 72).  
* A Playlist consists of a list that describes the order in  
which originals are to be played back, and is not an  
actually copy of the original. This lets you edit using  
less disc space.  
Adding a part to the Playlist  
(See page 73).  
Select the Playlist and then edit.  
Erasing the Titles (See page 71).  
Erasing a Part from the Playlist  
(See page 75).  
Original  
Original  
Original  
Moving the Title (See page 75).  
Adding a Part from the Original to the  
Playlist (See page 76).  
Playlist  
1
Adding Chapter Marker in a Playlist  
(See page 77).  
Renaming the Title (See page 78).  
Navimark (See page 79).  
Æ When Recorded in Video Mode  
Playlists cannot be created from recordings recorded in  
the Video mode. Recorded contents that can be edited  
are indicated below.  
Input the title names (page 66)  
Erasure of titles (page 71)  
* Title erasurein the case of recordings that have  
been recorded in the Video mode is provided so that  
the title is no longer displayed during playback, and  
does not mean that the recording is actually erased.  
(Remaining recording time does not increase.  
However, in the case of DVD-RW discs that have  
been recorded in the Video mode, remaining  
recording time can be increased only by erasing the  
last recorded title.)  
* Discs cannot be edited after they have been  
finalized (page 88).  
* Recordings can be added and edited with this  
recorder only until a disc has been finalized.  
63  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
63  
03.1.9, 7:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Disc  
I Switching to Original Editing Screen  
during Playback  
Switching between  
Playlist and Original  
Playback  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
2/10  
3/10  
DVD-RW  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
00:30:00  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
I Switching Between Original and Playlist  
when Power is turned ON  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
Example of Original  
screen  
03 VR  
01:00:00  
REM 1:59SP  
ORG  
DVD-RW  
02  
+
VCR PLUS  
EDIT  
The display switches to  
The screen for editing  
originals is displayed  
when operation is  
switched to DiscNavi  
or editing.  
TIMER PROG.  
the editing screen  
when EDIT is pressed  
during playback.  
REC MODE  
4:55  
AM  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
EDIT(ORG)  
1
PAGE 1/ 2  
3
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
Press this button to  
switch between  
Original and Playlist  
2
5
PLAY  
4
6
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
1/02  
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
ON  
Example of Playlist  
screen  
03 VR  
01:00:00  
REM 1:59SP  
PL  
NOTE  
DVD-RW  
02  
Discs that have been edited with another  
DVD recorder and contain more than 201  
chapter markers cannot be edited  
(recorded) with this recorder.  
Discs on which parts have been added or  
erased more than 51 times for a single title  
with another DVD recorder, and discs that  
are protected cannot be edited (or  
recorded).  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
The screen for editing  
the playlist is  
displayed when  
operation is switched  
to DiscNavi or editing.  
4:55  
AM  
NOTE  
The display does not switch to the Playlist  
screen when a playlist has not been created.  
Operation automatically returns to Original  
if contents are recorded when editing is  
switched to Playlist.  
This recorder cannot be used to edit exact  
frames.  
When editing a recording by adding  
chapter markers or erasing parts and so  
forth, there may be a slight discrepancy  
between the frames to be edited and the  
frames that are actually edited.  
I Switching Between Original and Playlist  
with DiscNavi  
Example of Original  
screen  
DISCNAVI(ORG)  
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
1
2
4
5
6
Switches when an  
Original is played  
back.  
When playing back a disc that has been  
edited in frame units with another DVD  
recorder, the start and end points may be  
altered slightly, or the DiscNavi screen may  
be slightly different.  
1/02  
3:42AM CH  
SELECT  
2 SP  
RETURN  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
Press this button to  
switch between  
Original and Playlist  
Example of Playlist  
screen  
DISCNAVI(PL)  
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
1
2
4
5
6
Switches when a  
Playlist is played  
back.  
1/02  
3:42AM PL  
SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
NOTE  
The display does not switch to the Playlist  
screen when a playlist has not been  
created.  
64  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
64  
03.1.9, 7:40 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an OriginalTitle  
Erasing a Part from the  
6 When you confirm the part to  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
Original  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
erase, press \ to select YES”  
DVD RW  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• The title is played back without the  
erased part.  
VR MODE  
DNR  
ZOOM  
INPUT  
FUNCTION  
You can erase a part of a title currently in the  
Original content.  
TITLE  
MENU  
SET/  
You cannot edit a finalized disc recorded in  
Video mode.  
EDIT(ORG) ERASE PART  
RETURN  
ENTER  
1
ERASE  
YES  
+
NO  
VCR PLUS  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
stopped.  
7 Press \ to select YESand then  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
press SET/ENTER.  
100  
REV  
FWD  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
• The selected part is erased.  
PLAY  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
8 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
STOP  
EDIT(ORG)  
Resetting Start and End Points  
The start point and end point can be  
reset until a part is erased. After  
returning to setting of start point and end  
point with RETURN, reselect the part  
using the procedures of steps 4 and 5.  
1
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
PROTECT  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
EDIT  
VOL  
CH  
POWER INPUT  
1/  
SELECT  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
TV CONTROL  
ENTER  
ENTER  
• The start point is canceled when  
REV and  
SKIP are pressed to  
3 Press ' / " to select “ERASE  
go back to before the start point after  
the start point has been set.  
PART.” and then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• The selected title is played back.  
• Some playback buttons can be used  
when searching for a part (page 74).  
EDIT(ORG) ERASE PART  
Important!  
1
START POINT  
Selecting Start Point and End Point when  
Erasing a Part  
• The first and last 5 seconds of a title to be  
edited cannot be selected as part  
erasure (start or end) points. If a start  
point is selected during the first 5  
seconds from the start of a title, the start  
of the title becomes the start point. When  
the last 5 seconds from the end of a title  
is selected as a start point or end point,  
the point 5 seconds before the end of the  
title is selected as the start point or end  
point. When the end of a title has been  
selected, the end of a title is selected as  
the end point. In addition, when erasing 5  
seconds before or after a chapter marker  
that has been automatically added during  
addition or erasure of a part as well,  
those parts cannot be selected as part  
erasure (start or end) points in the same  
manner as above.  
1/1  
‰‰:‰‰:‰9  
• Press |PLAY, FWD  
STILL/PAUSE,  
or SLOW to find the part to erase.  
,
REV,  
SKIP, SKIP  
4 Press SET/ENTER to set the start  
point of the part to erase.  
EDIT(ORG) ERASE PART  
1
END POINT  
1/1  
‰‰:‰‰:21  
5 Press SET/ENTER to set the end  
point of the part.  
• The title will become still mode.  
EDIT(ORG) ERASE PART  
• Once a specified range has been erased,  
it is completely erased. Since it cannot be  
restored to its prior state, use caution  
when erasing by checking the contents in  
advance.  
1
PREVIEW  
YES  
NO  
1/1  
‰‰:‰‰:3‰  
65  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
65  
03.1.14, 2:50 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title  
NOTE  
• Start and end points may change slightly.  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select “DEL”  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• Delete the character at the cursor  
position.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
When erasing a part, select a part that  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
continues for at least 5 seconds. Parts of less  
than 5 seconds duration cannot be erased.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
3 Press ' /"/\/| to select a  
character you want to enter and then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Enter the character at the cursor  
position.  
4 Repeat the above step to change  
other characters.  
TITLE  
• In the case of increasing remaining  
recording time by erasing a part selected  
from an original title, erase a part that  
continues for at least 1 minute. In addition,  
a chapter marker is automatically inserted  
at the location of the erased part.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
• Parts can be added or erased no more  
than 50 times for a single title.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
EDIT(ORG) RENAME  
• Discs on which parts have been added or  
erased more than 51 times for a single title  
with another DVD recorder can only be  
played back or initialized.  
ABCDE abcde +-/ =  
FGHIJ fghij &\$%# SPACE  
KLMNO klmno []{}<  
PQRST pqrst >|_^@  
END  
REV  
FWD  
DEL  
FWD  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
UVWXY uvwxy 12345 BACK  
Z,.!? z”’:; 6789  
STOP  
1/  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
Inputting/Renaming the  
Title  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
5 Press '/"/\/| to select END”  
and then press SET/ENTER. to  
fix the name.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
TV CONTROL  
When material is recorded, a title name that  
includes the date, time, channel number and  
other information is created automatically. You  
can change the title name to any name you  
desire. (The title name can no longer be  
changed once a disc recorded in the Video  
mode has been finalized.)  
6 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
NOTE  
• Up to 24 characters can be entered.  
Adding Chapter Markers  
You can put a chapter marker anywhere in a  
title. (This function does not operate if the  
disc is recorded in Video mode.)  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
stopped.  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
stopped.  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
EDIT(ORG)  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
4
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
PROTECT  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(ORG)  
1
1/  
SELECT  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
ENTER  
ENTER  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
PROTECT  
3 Press ' /" to select “RENAME”  
1/  
SELECT  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Rename the title.  
1 Move the cursor to a character you  
want to change.  
• Press '/"/\/| to select “FWD”  
or “BACK” and then press SET/  
ENTER to move the cursor.  
66  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
66  
03.1.14, 9:35 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title  
Erasing Chapter  
3 Press ' / " to select “CHP  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
Markers  
MARK” and then press SET/  
You can erase chapter markers that you no  
longer want. Chapter markers that have been  
added in the editing procedure (page 66) can  
be erased. Chapter markers that have been  
added automatically during the following  
procedures cannot be erased (chapter  
markers are displayed in red in step 4).  
• Chapter markers that have been set  
automatically during recording  
• Chapter markers that have been added  
automatically when parts have been added  
or erased (pages 66 and 73)  
(Chapter markers cannot be erased from  
discs recorded in the Video mode.)  
ENTER.  
• The selected title is played back.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
EDIT(ORG) CHAPTER MARK  
1
SET/  
CHP MARK  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
1/1 ‰‰:‰‰:‰8  
2 3:42AM CH 2 SP  
3/  
SET  
REC MODE  
ENTER  
ERASE  
ENTER  
ERASE  
RETURN  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
• Press |PLAY, FWD  
,
REV,  
,
REV  
FWD  
STILL/PAUSE, SKIP  
PLAY  
SKIP, SLOW or SKIP SEARCH  
to find the point to put a chapter  
marker.  
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
STOP  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
stopped.  
4 Press SET/ENTER to put a  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
EDIT  
VOL  
CH  
PLAY LIST  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
chapter marker.  
• The material being played back  
pauses, and the added chapter  
marker is displayed in orange.  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
TV CONTROL  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(ORG) CHAPTER MARK  
EDIT(ORG)  
1
1
CHP MARK  
YES NO  
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
PROTECT  
1/1  
2
SELECT  
‰‰:‰‰:15  
2 SP  
3/  
3:42AM CH  
1/  
SELECT  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
NOTE  
3 Press ' / " to select CHP  
Intervals at which Chapter Markers are  
Added  
MARKand then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• The selected title is played back.  
• Leave an interval of at least 5 seconds  
between an existing chapter marker and  
the chapter marker that you want to add. A  
chapter marker cannot be added if this  
interval is too short.  
EDIT(ORG) CHAPTER MARK  
1
CHP MARK  
5 Press \ to select YES.  
• When you want to re-select the point,  
select “NO”. The screen in the step 3  
appears.  
1/1 ‰‰:‰‰:‰8  
2 3:42AM CH 2 SP  
3/  
SET  
ENTER  
ERASE  
ENTER  
ERASE  
RETURN  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The added chapter marker is  
displayed in blue.  
• If you want to add another chapter  
marker, repeat steps 3 through 6.  
• Pressing RETURN returns the  
operation to the screen described in  
step 2.  
7 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
67  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
67  
03.1.14, 3:03 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title  
Navimark  
4 Playback the chapter (The marker  
DVD RW  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
is blue) that you want to erase.  
VR MODE  
• Press |PLAY, FWD  
,
REV,  
or  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
In the DiscNavi, each title is shown with a still  
frame picture. You can select a different still  
picture from within a title.  
STILL/PAUSE, SKIP  
SKIP to find the point to erase a  
chapter marker.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
• Red chapter markers cannot be  
selected.  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
RETURN  
ENTER  
stopped.  
+
VCR PLUS  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
TIMER PROG.  
EDIT(ORG) CHAPTER MARK  
1
CHP MARK  
REC MODE  
Navi screen  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
EDIT(ORG)  
1
PAGE 1/ 2  
3
3/4 ‰‰:‰‰:‰8  
2 3:42AM CH 2 SP  
2
5
REV  
FWD  
3/  
SET  
ENTER  
ERASE  
PLAY  
ENTER  
ERASE  
RETURN  
4
6
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
STOP  
5 Press ERASE during playback  
1/02  
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
SLOW  
SEARCH  
the chapter.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
EDIT  
VOL  
CH  
• The material being played back  
returns to the start of the chapter, and  
the chapter marker turns orange.  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the  
desired title and then press SET/  
ENTER.  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
EDIT(ORG) CHAPTER MARK  
1
COMBINE  
YES  
NO  
EDIT(ORG)  
1
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
PROTECT  
3/4  
‰‰:‰‰:22  
6 Press \ to select “YES”.  
• When you want to re-select the  
chapter marker, select “NO”. The  
screen in the step 4 appears.  
1/  
SELECT  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3 Press ' / " to select  
7 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The chapter marker is erased and the  
part is connected to the previous  
chapter.  
NAVIMARKand then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• The selected title is played back.  
• If you want to add erase chapter  
mark, repeat steps 4 through 7.  
• Pressing RETURN returns the  
operation to the screen described in  
step 2.  
EDIT(ORG) NAVIMARK  
1
NAVIMARK  
1/1  
2
‰‰:‰‰:‰9  
2 SP  
ENTER  
1/  
3:42AM CH  
8 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
ENTER  
CHANGE POINT  
RETURN  
68  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
68  
03.1.14, 9:36 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title  
Protecting the Title  
4 Select the desired part displayed  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
DVD RW  
POWER  
in the DiscNavi.  
VR MODE  
• Press |PLAY, FWD  
,
REV,  
,
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
This prevents disc contents from being edited  
or erased so that they cannot be altered by  
mistake. This is convenient for keeping discs  
safe during editing. (This function cannot be  
used with discs recorded in the Video mode.)  
STILL/PAUSE, SKIP  
SKIP, SLOW or SKIP SEARCH  
to find the desired part.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
EDIT(ORG) NAVIMARK  
+
VCR PLUS  
1
NAVIMARK  
NOTE  
TIMER PROG.  
• The protect function cannot be used in the  
case of playlists or discs recorded in the  
Video mode.  
REC MODE  
1/1  
2
‰‰:‰‰:‰9  
2 SP  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
1/  
3:42AM CH  
100  
ENTER  
CHANGE POINT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
REV  
FWD  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
PLAY  
5 Press SET/ENTER at the point  
stopped.  
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
you want to set as Navimark.  
• The material being played back  
pauses.  
STOP  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the  
desired title and then press SET/  
ENTER.  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
EDIT  
VOL  
CH  
EDIT(ORG) NAVIMARK  
1
CHANGE  
YES  
NO  
TV CONTROL  
EDIT(ORG)  
3
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
PROTECT  
1/1  
2
SELECT  
‰‰:‰‰:3‰  
2 SP  
1/  
3:42AM CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
6 Press \ to select “YES”.  
• When you want to re-select the part,  
select “NO”. The screen in the step 2  
appears.  
1/  
SELECT  
2
3:42AM CH  
2 SP  
RETURN  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3 Press ' / " to select PROTECT”  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
7 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The screen in the step 2 appears.  
EDIT(ORG) PROTECT  
3
PROTECT  
YES  
8 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
NO  
4 Press \ to select YESand then  
press SET/ENTER and press  
RETURN.  
Protect mark  
EDIT(ORG)  
1
PAGE 1/ 2  
3
2
5
4
6
• A protect mark  
is inserted in  
protected titles. (Protect marks can be  
confirmed on either the DiscNavi Title  
List screen or Edit Title List screen.)  
5 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
69  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
69  
03.1.14, 9:37 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title  
Cancelling the Protection  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
NOTE  
• A protect mark is attached to all titles when  
disc protect is set to “ON” in the  
“PROTECT” (page 88) of the “DISC  
SETUP” menu.  
In this case, none of the titles can be  
unprotected. (Cancel disc protection in the  
“Disc Setup Screen” to unprotect discs.)  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
stopped.  
100  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
2 Press '/"/\/| to select the  
protected title and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
EDIT(ORG) PROTECT  
3
UNPROTECT  
YES NO  
4 Press \ to select “YES” and then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Title protect is canceled and the  
protect mark is no longer displayed.  
5 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
70  
DV_RW2U#p62-70.p65  
70  
03.1.14, 9:37 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing aTitle from the Original or Playlist  
Erasing All Titles  
Erasing One Title  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
DVD RW  
DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
This allows all Original or Playlist titles to be  
erased. (If a Playlist (page 72) has been  
created, all of the Playlist titles are erased if  
the Original title is erased.)  
This is used to erase a specific title by selecting  
that title. Since remaining recording time can be  
increased by erasing unnecessary titles, this  
function is convenient since it enables you to  
record repeatedly on the same disc.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
NOTE  
In the case of DVD-RW discs (Video mode),  
remaining recording time can only be  
TIMER PROG.  
Erasing all titles differs initialization in the ways  
indicated below.  
increased by erasing the last title on the disc.  
REC MODE  
• Titles which is protected are not erased.  
• Disc timer recording programs are not  
erased.  
• Remaining recording time does not  
increase in the case of DVD-R discs.  
In the case a Playlist has been created, the  
erased portions are no longer present when  
the Playlist is played back.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
1 Press ERASE while the disc is  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
stopped.  
1 Perform the steps 1 and 2 of  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
• The Erase Title screen appears.  
SLOW  
Erasing All Titleson this page.  
• Pressing ERASE during playback  
changes the display to the screen of  
step 3, allowing you to erase the title  
currently being played back.  
ORIGINAL/  
ON  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
select Original or Playlist.  
• Operation cannot be switched  
between Original and Playlist for a  
disc on which a Playlist has not been  
created.  
2 Press ' / " to select  
1 TITLEand then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• Discs recorded in the Video mode  
cannot contain Playlists.  
ERASE TITLE (ORG)  
1 TITLE  
ERASE TI.(ORG) PAGE 1/ 2  
1
2
3
ALL TITLE  
4
5
6
3
Press ' / "to select “ALL TITLE”  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/"/\/|to select the title  
you want to erase and then press  
SET/ENTER.  
ERASE TITLE (ORG)  
1 TITLE  
ALL (EXCEPT PROTECT)  
YES  
NO  
ERASE TITLE(ORG)  
ERASE  
CAREFUL OF  
PLAYLIST  
YES  
NO  
4 Press \ to select YESand then  
CAREFUL OF  
press SET/ENTER.  
4 Press \ to select YESand then  
• All titles will be erased and then  
return to the normal screen.  
press SET/ENTER.  
• The selected titles will be erased and  
then return to the screen in the step 2.  
NOTE  
• About 2 minutes may be required for  
processing depending on the recording  
status of the disc, such as in the case the  
disc contains a lot of titles.  
5 Press RETURN to exit the Erase  
Title screen.  
• Press RETURN again to return to the  
normal screen.  
NOTE  
• Protected titles are not erased.  
• The protect function is not available for  
Playlists and discs recorded in the Video  
mode.  
71  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
71  
03.1.14, 10:58 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a New Playlist (PL)  
You can create a new Playlist by specifying  
4 Press ' / " to select TITLEand  
the range of the material to be made into a  
Playlist from an Original. When specifying the  
range of a Playlist, the titles used for the  
Playlist have to be consecutive titles. DVD-  
RW discs recorded in the VR mode can be  
used to create Playlists. (Playlists cannot be  
created with DVD-R discs or DVD-RW discs  
recorded in the Video mode.)  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
then press SET/ENTER.  
The Original Navi screen appears.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
EDIT(PL) TITLE PAGE 1/ 2  
TITLE  
1
2
3
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4
5
6
+
VCR PLUS  
You can add up to 99 titles to the Playlist.  
SELECT THE TITLE OF ORG  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Making a Playlist from  
Original Title  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
5 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
100  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
you want to copy and then press  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
SET/ENTER.  
A new Playlist is created.  
One title of an Original can be used as the  
title of the Playlist. (The entire contents of the  
selected Original become the title of the  
Playlist.)  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
EDIT(PL)  
1
PAGE 1/ 1  
SLOW  
NEW  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
ON  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
stopped.  
The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
1/  
2  
6:  
6AM PL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
select Playlist mode.  
The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
NOTE  
The operation of copying a title does not  
actually copy the title of the Original, but  
rather writes information indicating that the  
Original title is to be used as the title of the  
Playlist. Consequently, editing can be  
performed without reducing available  
space on the disc.  
EDIT(PL)  
NEW  
PAGE 1/ 1  
Only chapter markers automatically  
created at the start of recording and  
erasure of a part are copied.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
When creating a Playlist from an Original  
title, Navimark information has been  
changed or the title name of the Original  
title is not copied.  
Chapter markers that have been copied to  
a Playlist cannot be erased.  
Since a title does not exist at this point,  
a title frame that does not contain a  
picture is displayed.  
Select a title frame that does not contain  
a picture when creating a new Playlist.  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
The Playlist Make screen appears.  
EDIT(PL)  
MAKE TTL  
ORIGINAL  
TITLE  
PART  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
72  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
72  
03.1.9, 7:42 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a New Playlist (PL)  
Adding a Part to the  
Playlist  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
5 Press SET/ENTER to set the  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
start point of the part.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
• Press |PLAY, FWD  
,
REV,  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
STILL/PAUSE, SKIP  
,
You can select part of an Original title as a  
new title to add to the Playlist.  
TITLE  
SKIP, SLOW or SKIP SEARCH  
to find the start point.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
+
VCR PLUS  
stopped.  
EDIT(PL)  
1
MAKE TITLE  
END POINT  
TIMER PROG.  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
1/1  
‰‰:‰1:26  
100  
select Playlist mode.  
• The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
REV  
FWD  
ENTER  
END POINT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
PLAY  
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
6 Press SET/ENTER to set the end  
STOP  
point of the part.  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
EDIT(PL)  
NEW  
PAGE 1/ 1  
SEARCH  
SLOW  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
ON  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
EDIT  
EDIT(PL)  
1
MAKE TITLE  
PREVIEW  
YES  
VOL  
CH  
NO  
TV CONTROL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
‰‰:‰1:26  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Since a title does not exist at this  
point, a title frame that does not  
contain a picture is displayed.  
NOTE  
Select a title frame that does not contain  
a picture when creating a new Playlist.  
• When copying a part, make sure to select a  
part that continues for at least 5 seconds.  
Parts of less than 5 seconds duration  
cannot be copied.  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The Playlist Make screen appears.  
Resetting Start Point and End Point  
• Until you have actually set the range, the  
start point and end point can be reset.  
After going back to setting the start point  
and end point by pressing RETURN,  
perform step 5 or step 6 to reselect the  
part.  
EDIT(PL)  
MAKE TTL  
ORIGINAL  
TITLE  
PART  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
7 Press \ to select YESto  
4 Press ' / " to select “PART” and  
confirm the part.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• The Original title is played back.  
EDIT(PL)  
1
MAKE TITLE  
START POINT  
1/1  
‰‰:‰‰:‰5  
ENTER  
START POINT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
73  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
73  
03.1.14, 9:38 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a New Playlist (PL)  
Æ Pause  
When you have found a part that is close to  
8 Press SET/ENTER.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
• The part is played back from the start  
point to the end point.  
the start point or end point, press STILL/  
PAUSE. Pausing playback makes it easier  
to search for parts. Parts cannot be edited  
in exact frames. The start point and end  
point may shift slightly.  
Æ Frame advance/Frame reverse  
Recorded material is played back by  
reversing individual frames when  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
• If you select “NO” in the step 7, go to  
step 9.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EDIT(PL)  
1
MAKE TITLE  
MAKE  
+
YES  
NO  
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
F.ADV  
part. When  
recorded material is played back while  
reversing individual frames. (There is an  
error of 2-3 frames during frame advance  
playback.)  
is pressed after pausing the  
REC MODE  
F.ADV is pressed,  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
9 Press \ to select “YES” and then  
PLAY  
press SET/ENTER.  
• The new title appears in the updated  
Playlist.  
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
Æ Final selection of part  
STOP  
Press SLOW after the part has been  
paused and select the start point and end  
point by slow playback.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
EDIT  
EDIT(PL)  
1
PAGE 1/ 1  
NEW  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
1/  
2  
6:  
SELECT  
6AM PL  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Searching for Start Point  
and End Point Parts  
You can use the procedures described below  
during playback to search for the start point  
and end point parts.  
Æ Playback  
Press |PLAY to playback the current title  
that is paused.  
Æ Searching for parts within a chapter  
FWD  
or  
REV are convenient when  
searching for parts within a chapter.  
Æ Rapidly skipping parts  
When the editing screen is displayed,  
pressing SKIP SEARCH lets you skip by  
recorded material at 5 minute intervals,  
which is convenient for rapidly moving  
through parts. This can be pressed  
consecutively up to 4 times, enabling you  
to skip 20 minutes of recorded material all  
at once.  
Only use the skip function within the same  
title.  
Æ Moving to the start of titles and chapters  
When currently viewing or a title or chapter  
that is far away from the part to be  
selected, first search for the title or chapter  
with the  
SKIP or SKIP  
.
74  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
74  
03.1.14, 9:39 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a PlaylistTitle  
Erasing a Part from the  
Playlist  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
Moving the Title  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
TIMER  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
You can change the playing order of Playlist  
titles.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
You can erase a part from the Playlist. If you  
erase a part, nothing is actually erased from  
the Original title.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
+
VCR PLUS  
stopped.  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears  
TIMER PROG.  
stopped.  
REC MODE  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
select Playlist mode.  
• The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
REV  
FWD  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
PLAY  
select Playlist mode.  
• The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
EDIT(PL)  
1
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
2
5
SLOW  
3 Perform the steps 2 to 8 of  
“Erasing a Part from the Original”  
on page 65.  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
ON  
4
NEW  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
1/02  
6:12AM PL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
NOTE  
A chapter marker is inserted automatically  
when a part has been erased.  
Since editing cannot be performed in exact  
frames, the start point and end point may shift.  
3 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• When erasing a part, select a part that  
continues for at least 5 seconds. Parts of  
less than 5 seconds duration cannot be  
erased.  
• Parts can be added or erased up to 50  
times per title.  
EDIT(PL)  
3
MOVE  
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
ADD PART  
1/‰2  
6:1‰AM PL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Press ' / " to select MOVE”  
Important!  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• The first and last 5 seconds of a title to be  
edited cannot be selected as part  
erasure (start or end) points. If a start  
point is selected during the first 5  
5 Press '/"/\/| to select the  
place you want to move the title.  
seconds from the start of a title, the start  
of the title becomes the start point. When  
the last 5 seconds from the end of a title  
is selected as a start point or end point,  
the point 5 seconds before the end of the  
title is selected as the start point or end  
point. When the end of a title has been  
selected, the end of a title is selected as  
the end point. In addition, when erasing 5  
seconds before or after a chapter mark  
that has been automatically added during  
addition or erasure of a part as well,  
those parts cannot be selected as part  
erasure (start or end) points in the same  
manner as above.  
EDIT(PL) MOVE  
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
1
2
4
5
Destination cursor  
Selected file  
75  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
75  
03.1.14, 9:39 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Playlist Title  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/"/\/| to select the title  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
• When having selected a destination  
that is before a selected file, the file  
moves to the destination immediately  
before the selected title.  
ON/OFF  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
EDIT(PL)  
1
MOVE  
TITLE  
ERASE PART  
RENAME  
CHP MARK  
NAVIMARK  
ADD PART  
EDIT(PL)  
1
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
EDIT(PL) MOVE  
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
2
5
1
2
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4
5
4
NEW  
+
VCR PLUS  
1/‰2  
SELECT  
6:1‰AM PL  
SELECT THE DESTINATION  
1/02  
6:12AM PL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Example: When Title 3 has been selected  
and the destination cursor is  
placed at Title 1, Title 3 moves  
before Title 1.  
4 Press ' / " to select “ADD  
PART” and then press SET/  
ENTER.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
• When having selected a destination  
that is after a selected file, the file  
moves to the destination immediately  
after the selected title.  
STILL/PAUSE  
REC  
EDIT(PL)  
1
ADD PART  
START POINT  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ORIGINAL/  
ON  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
EDIT  
PLAY LIST  
EDIT(PL) MOVE  
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
EDIT(PL)  
1
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
1/2  
‰‰:‰‰:‰5  
1
2
2
5
VOL  
CH  
ENTER  
START POINT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4
5
4
NEW  
TV CONTROL  
SELECT THE DESTINATION  
1/02  
6:12AM PL  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
5 Press SET/ENTER to set the  
Example: When Title 3 has been selected  
and the destination cursor is  
placed at Title 4, Title 3 moves  
after Title 4.  
start point of the part.  
• Press |PLAY, FWD  
,
REV,  
STILL/PAUSE, SKIP  
,
SKIP, SLOW or SKIP SEARCH  
to find the start point.  
• The Original title is played back.  
7 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
Adding a Part from the  
Original to the Playlist  
EDIT(PL)  
1
ADD PART  
END POINT  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
1/2  
‰‰:‰‰:5‰  
A part selected from an Original is added to  
the end of the Playlist title.  
ENTER  
END POINT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
stopped.  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
select Playlist mode.  
• The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
EDIT(PL)  
1
PAGE 1/ 1  
3
2
5
4
NEW  
1/02  
6:12AM PL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
76  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
76  
03.1.14, 10:58 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Playlist Title  
6 Press SET/ENTER to set the end  
10 Press EDIT to exit the edit mode.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
point of the part.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
• A chapter marker is automatically inserted  
at the start point where the part was  
added.  
When erasing a part, select a part that  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
continues for at least 5 seconds. Parts of less  
than 5 seconds duration cannot be erased.  
TITLE  
• Discs on which parts have been added or  
erased more than 51 times for a single title  
with another DVD recorder can only be  
played back or initialized.  
SET/  
• Parts can be added or erased up to 50  
times per title.  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
• The start point is canceled when  
REV  
TIMER PROG.  
or SKIP is pressed to go back to  
before the start point after the start point  
has been set.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
• Some playback buttons can be used when  
searching for a part (page 74).  
• Until you have actually set the range, the  
start point and end point can be reset.  
After going back to setting the start point  
and end point by pressing RETURN,  
perform step 5 or step 6 to reselect the  
part.  
100  
Adding Chapter Marker in  
a Playlist  
REV  
FWD  
PLAY  
DVD RW  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
VR MODE  
STOP  
You can put a chapter marker anywhere in a  
title.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
ORIGINAL/  
ON  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
stopped.  
7 Press \ to select “YES”.  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
EDIT(PL)  
1
ADD PART  
PREVIEW  
YES  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
NO  
select Playlist mode.  
• The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
‰‰:‰‰:5‰  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3 Perform the steps 2 to 7 of  
Adding Chapter Markerson  
8 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The part is played back from the start  
point to the end point.  
page 66.  
• The procedure is the same for  
addition of chapter markers of  
Original recordings.  
EDIT(PL)  
1
ADD PART  
ADD  
YES  
NO  
NOTE  
When adding chapter markers during  
editing:  
• Allow an interval of at least 5 seconds  
between a chapter marker and the chapter  
marker you want to add. A chapter marker  
cannot be added if this interval is too short.  
‰‰:‰‰:5‰  
1/  
SELECT  
2
6:1‰AM PL  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
You can test playback the range from  
the added start point to the added  
end point.  
• It may take up to about 1 minute until  
the confirmation screen is displayed.  
9 Press \ to select YESand then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• The part is added to the end of  
Playlist 1.  
• The screen in the step 4 appears.  
77  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
77  
03.1.14, 3:03 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Playlist Title  
Erasing Chapter  
Marker in a Playlist  
Navimark  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
TITLE  
stopped.  
stopped.  
The Original Edit Title List screen  
The Original Edit Title List screen  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
appears.  
appears  
+
VCR PLUS  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
TIMER PROG.  
select Playlist mode.  
The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
select Playlist mode.  
The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
3 Perform the steps 2 to 8 of  
3 Perform the steps 2 to 8 of  
Erasing Chapter Markeron  
page 67.  
PLAY  
Navimarkon page 68.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
SEARCH  
NOTE  
ORIGINAL/  
DISPLAY SCREENPLAY LIST EDIT  
ON  
The following chapter markers cannot be  
erased. These chapter markers are displayed  
in red on the Chapter Erase screen (page 68,  
step 4).  
POWER INPUT  
TV CONTROL  
VOL  
CH  
Chapter markers that have been inserted  
automatically when recording is started.  
Chapter markers that have been added  
automatically after adding a part.  
Chapter markers that have been added  
automatically after erasing a part.  
Renaming the Title  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
1 Press EDIT while the disc is  
stopped.  
The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
select Playlist mode.  
The Playlist Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
3 Perform the steps 2 to 6 of  
Inputting/Renaming the Titleon  
page 66.  
78  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
78  
03.1.9, 7:43 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tamper Proof  
With this feature, you can lock all recorder  
modes to prevent accidental change. This  
function works even when the recorder power  
is off, thus preventing children from operating  
the recorder or viewing selected programs  
while you are away from home.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Tamper Proof Setting  
+
VCR PLUS  
DVD RW  
DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
AUDIO CD  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
Press and hold SET/ENTER and  
100  
RETURN together for more than 2  
REV  
FWD  
seconds.  
PLAY  
• “ on the Front Panel Display starts  
blinking and then lights up.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
Disengaging Tamper  
Proof  
Press and hold SET/ENTER and  
RETURN together for more than 2  
seconds when the Tamper Proof  
function is set.  
• “ starts blinking and then  
disappears. Now, Tamper Proof is  
disengaged.  
Operating during  
Tamper Proof  
on the Front Panel Display is blinking.  
NOTE  
This function does not work when the disc  
tray is opened.  
If an unplayable disc is loaded, the disc  
tray slides out automatically and then  
Tamper Proof function is disengaged.  
79  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
79  
03.1.9, 7:43 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback Setup Screen  
This section explains each item of playback setup. See  
“Basic Settings of the Playback Setup Screen” on page 82  
to set each item.  
PROGRESSIVE  
Clearer images containing minimal flickering can be  
enjoyed when playing back discs by connecting a  
progressive-compatible TV with a component.  
TV MODE  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
This lets you set whether you want to view played back  
material at an aspect ratio of 16:9 for wide screen TVs or at  
an aspect ratio of 4:3 for conventional TVs. (This setting is  
made to match the TV connected to this recorder.)  
TV MODE  
16:9  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
DD LEVEL  
Digital OUT  
OFF  
OFF  
PCM  
Digital  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
16:9  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
ON  
Æ ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
DD LEVEL  
Digital OUT  
OFF  
Set when the recorder is connected to a progressive-  
compatible TV.  
OFF  
PCM  
Digital  
• The screen may not switch to a 4:3 screen during  
progressive material depending on the TV you are  
using. If you want to view material on a 4:3 screen with  
such TVs, set “PROGRESSIVE” to “OFF”.  
Compatibility of this recorder with Progressive-  
compatible TVs:  
• Since some progressive-compatible TVs are currently  
not completely compatible with this recorder, there may  
be times when images may not appear clearly. If a  
problem occurs during progressive playback, set  
“PROGRESSIVE” to “OFF”.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4:3 PS  
— (Pan & Scan mode): When wide-screen  
video material is played, this mode clips the right and  
left sides of the image so that it can be viewed on a  
conventional TV screen.  
• Some wide-screen DVDs that do not permit Pan &  
Scan mode playback are automatically played in  
letterbox mode (black bands top and bottom).  
4:3 LB  
— (Letterbox mode): When wide-screen video  
Æ OFF  
material is played in this mode on a conventional TV  
screen, black bands appear at the top and bottom of  
the screen.  
Set when the recorder is connected to a TV that is not  
progressive-compatible.  
• When the recorder is connected to a TV that is not  
progressive-compatible and “PROGRESSIVE” is set to  
“ON”, there is no video output.  
:
16 9  
— (Wide-screen TV): This is the correct mode for  
playing wide-screen videos on a wide-screen TV.  
You must also set the screen mode on your wide-  
screen TV to “FULL”.  
NOTE  
• The DV output cannot be used during progressive  
playback.  
NOTE  
When recording wide screen material (16:9) from a  
satellite broadcast in the Video mode:  
• The screen becomes longer in the vertical direction when  
playing back with this recorder or another DVD player  
and viewing on a normal (4:3) TV.  
• The screen also becomes longer in the vertical direction  
when playing back with a PC capable of playing back  
DVD video. (The output is set at 16:9 regardless of the TV  
screen setting during playback.)  
When recording wide screen material (16:9) from a  
satellite broadcast in the VR mode:  
• When playing back with this recorder and viewing with a  
normal (4:3) TV, the screen size during playback can be  
changed according to the setting for “TV MODE” of  
“PLAYBACK SETUP”. However, if the recording mode of  
the disc is set to LP or EP, the material will be played  
back in “4:3 LB” even if “TV MODE” of “PLAYBACK  
SETUP” is set to “4:3 PS”.  
80  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
80  
03.1.14, 9:23 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback Setup Screen  
PARENTAL  
DD LEVEL  
(Dolby Digital Output Level)  
When Dolby Digital is used to record the audio on a DVD  
disc, the average overall volume level of the audio is  
relatively lower than that produced by an Audio CD. This is  
to provide the widest possible dynamic range. To  
counteract this, this recorder automatically raises the overall  
average volume level of a disc recorded using Dolby Digital  
to a level that is similar to that of an Audio CD.  
Certain discs come preset with country codes and parental  
level settings defined for particular countries.  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
PARENTAL  
LEVEL  
16:9  
ON  
CONF  
OFF  
CODE  
Digital OUT  
USA  
PCM  
Digital  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
16:9  
See “PARENTAL Level Setting” on page 82 for details.  
ON  
ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
DD LEVEL  
Digital OUT  
OFF  
OFF  
PCM  
DISC LANG.  
Use this setting for selecting “SUBTITLE”, “AUDIO” and  
“MENU”.  
Digital  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
ON: Dolby Digital average audio level is increased so it  
sounds similar to that of an Audio CD.  
OFF: Audio level recorded on disc is played back without  
modification.  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
16:9  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
SUB TITLE  
AUDIO  
OFF  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
MENU  
ENTER  
Digital OUT  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use this setting to enjoy Dolby Digital Surround audio by  
making a digital connection with equipment provided with a  
digital input jack.  
Æ SUBTITLE  
The language that has been set is your preferred subtitle  
language.  
Æ AUDIO  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
16:9  
The language that has been set is your preferred audio  
language.  
Æ MENU  
• The language that has been set is your preferred menu  
language.  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
DD LEVEL  
Digital OUT  
OFF  
OFF  
PCM  
Digital  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Disc language changes as follows:  
“ENGLISH” “FRENCH” “GERMAN” “ITALIAN”  
“SPANISH” “CHINESE” “SWEDISH” ➝  
“DUTCH” “OTHER:AA...ZU”  
• If you select “OTHER”, see “Language Code List for  
Disc Language” on page 85 when selecting the code.  
Æ PCM  
PCM audio can be enjoyed by making a digital connec-  
tion with 2 channel audio equipment and MD players.  
Dolby Digital audio is output in the form of PCM (non-  
compressed) audio that can be played back with 2  
channel audio equipment.  
See “DISC LANGUAGE Setting” on page 84 for details.  
Æ
DIGITAL  
You can enjoy Dolby Surround audio by making a digital  
connection with audio equipment compatible with Dolby  
Digital (5.1 ch). DTS audio can be enjoyed by connecting  
with an amplifier or other equipment compatible with DTS  
Digital Surround.  
81  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
81  
03.1.15, 9:47 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback Setup Screen  
Basic Settings of the  
PARENTAL Level Setting  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD VIDEO  
Playback Setup Screen  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Certain discs come preset with country codes  
and parental level settings defined for  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
TITLE  
NOTE  
particular countries. Discs equipped with the  
parental lock function are rated according to  
their content. The rated content allowed by a  
parental lock level and the way a DVD can be  
controlled vary from disc to disc. Some discs,  
for example, may let you edit out parts and  
replace them with parts suitable for children.  
You can also use the parental lock to  
During playback, you cannot set each item  
in the SETUP screen. Press ISTOP to stop  
playback.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
Example: Set PROGRESSIVEto ON”  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
100  
REV  
FWD  
display the SETUP screen.  
completely disable playback of the DVD.  
PLAY  
REC  
SETUP  
STILL/PAUSE  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
STOP  
display the SETUP screen.  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
2 Press ' / " to select the  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
PLAYBACKand then press  
OSD LANGUAGE  
SELECT  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SET/ENTER.  
The PLAYBACK SETUP screen  
appears.  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press ' / " to select “PLAY-  
BACK” and then press SET/  
3 Press ' / " to select  
ENTER.  
The PLAYBACK SETUP screen  
appears.  
PARENTAL.  
4 Press \ / |.  
The password specificaiton and  
verification screen appears.  
3 Press ' / " to select “PROGRES-  
SIVE”.  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
16:9  
ON  
PSWD. =????  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
16:9  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
DD LEVEL  
Digital OUT  
OFF  
If you have already set your pass-  
word, (password verifica-  
OFF  
PCM  
Digital  
ENTER  
tion display) appears.  
Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Press \ / | to select “ON”.  
5 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
5 Use the number buttons to enter a  
4-digit password.  
setting.  
When you set the password for the  
first time, enter the same password  
again. The password will be  
automatically stored.  
You can exit the SETUP screen by  
pressing SETUP/FUNCTION.  
NOTE  
Enter the numbers slowly as each number  
is stored separately.  
If you forget your password, you can erase  
your current password by pressing  
ISTOP four times.  
82  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
82  
03.1.14, 9:26 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback Setup Screen  
6 The cursor is moved to LEVEL”  
and then press \ / | to select  
LEVEL.  
9 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
setting.  
Press SETUP/FUNCTION to exit the  
SETUP screen.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TITLE  
Important!  
TV MODE  
16:9  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
SET/  
ENTER  
Be sure to try playing back the disc to  
confirm that the parental level setting is  
working correctly. If it is not working  
correctly, try changing the country  
code.  
RETURN  
PARENTAL  
LEVEL  
CONF  
OFF  
+
CODE  
Digital OUT  
USA  
PCM  
VCR PLUS  
Digital  
TIMER PROG.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
REC MODE  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
Level 1: for most restricted viewing Level  
8: for adult viewing  
NOTE  
100  
You can use the parental lock function only  
with DVD discs that are equipped with the  
parental lock feature.  
On some DVD discs, the PARENTAL level  
setting is fixed and cannot be modified.  
The parental level depends on countries. If  
you do not set the country code correctly, it  
fails to work correctly.  
Some DVD discs allow the viewer to  
temporarily change the parental level  
setting to view the original scenes. When  
this prompt appears, input the password to  
view the original scenes.  
REV  
FWD  
(The smaller the number, the greater the  
level of restriction.)  
When PARENTALis set to OFF, DVD  
discs can be played back regardless of the  
parental level.  
PLAY  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
The parental level for U.S.A. is as follows.  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
Level 7: NC-17 Level 6: R  
Level 3: PG Level 1: G  
Level 4: PG13  
TV CONTROL  
The parental level set up for Canada is  
prepared for future use. As for the set up of  
an appropriate level, please check the level  
when you purchase your DVD disc equipped  
with the parental feature.  
Country Code List  
USA  
FINLAND  
BELGIUM  
HONG KONG  
SINGAPORE  
THAILAND  
MALAYSIA  
INDONESIA  
TAIWAN  
7 Press ' / " to select CODE.  
CANADA  
JAPAN  
8 Press \ / | to select the desired  
GERMANY  
FRANCE  
UK  
country code.  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
16:9  
ITALY  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
PARENTAL  
LEVEL  
CODE  
CONF  
OFF  
USA  
PCM  
SPAIN  
SWISS  
PHILIPPINE  
AUSTRALIA  
RUSSIA  
Digital OUT  
Digital  
SWEDEN  
HOLLAND  
NORWAY  
DENMARK  
CHINA  
83  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
83  
03.1.9, 7:43 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback Setup Screen  
DISC LANGUAGE Setting  
DVD VIDEO  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
NOTE  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
• During playback, you cannot set each item  
in the SETUP screen. Press ISTOP to stop  
playback.  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
Example: Setting “SUBTITLE”  
TIMER PROG.  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
REC MODE  
display the SETUP screen.  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
2 Press ' / " to select “PLAY-  
REV  
FWD  
BACK” and then press SET/  
PLAY  
ENTER.  
• The PLAYBACK SETUP screen  
appears.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
3 Press ' / " to select “DISC  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
LANG.and then press |.  
Example: Selecting “SUBTITLE”  
TV CONTROL  
PLAYBACK SETUP  
TV MODE  
16:9  
PROGRESSIVE OFF  
ON  
PARENTAL  
DISC LANG.  
SUB TITLE  
AUDIO  
LEVEL:  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
MENU  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
4 Press ' / " to select “SUB  
TITLE”.  
5 Press \ / | to select the language  
you want to use.  
NOTE  
• Disc language changes as follows:  
“ENGLISH” “FRENCH” “GERMAN” ➝  
“ITALIAN” “SPANISH” “CHINESE” ➝  
“SWEDISH” “DUTCH” ➝  
“OTHER:AA...ZU”  
• If you select “OTHER”, see “Language  
Code List for Disc Language” on page 85  
when selecting the code.  
6 Press SET/ENTER to confirm the  
setting.  
You can set “AUDIO” and “MENU”  
the same way.  
• Press SETUP/FUNCTION to exit the  
SETUP screen.  
84  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
84  
03.1.15, 9:57 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Language Code List for Disc Language  
Code  
Language Name  
Code  
Language Name  
Code  
Language Name  
Code  
Language Name  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
SL  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
Afar  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
Frisian  
MG  
MI  
Malagasy  
Maori  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SV  
SW  
TA  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NL  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswat  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swedish  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Hindi  
Malay  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
Telugu  
Bislama  
Bengali;  
Bangla  
IE  
Dutch  
Tajik  
BN  
IK  
NO  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Thai  
IN  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Italian  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DA  
DE  
DZ  
EL  
EN  
EO  
ES  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Tibetan  
Breton  
IS  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
TK  
TL  
IT  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
IW  
JA  
JI  
Hebrew  
Panjabi  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
Japanese  
Yiddish  
PL  
Polish  
PS  
PT  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-  
Romance  
Kirundi  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Welsh  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Danish  
QU  
RM  
German  
Bhutani  
Greek  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
Twi  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
RN  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
English  
Esperanto  
Spanish  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Romanian  
Russian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapük  
Wolof  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZH  
ZU  
Kirghiz  
Xhosa  
Latin  
Sangho  
Yoruba  
Chinese  
Zulu  
Lingala  
Serbo-  
FJ  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
FO  
FR  
Faroese  
French  
SI  
SK  
LV  
85  
DV_RW2U#p71-85 .p65  
85  
03.1.9, 7:43 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Setup Screen  
This section explains each item of record setup. See “Basic  
Settings of the Record Setup Screen” on page 87 to set  
each item.  
R REC START  
When recording using a DVD-R disc, you need to press  
ÆREC twice.  
You can change this if you prefer DVD-R recording to work  
in the same way as recording to DVD-RW. This function is  
factory preset to “2 PRESS”.  
CHP INT.  
This is used to set the interval at which chapters are  
automatically inserted when recording in the Video mode.  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
L
R
V R VIDEO  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
OFF  
ON  
L
R
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
V R VIDEO  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EX. AUDIO  
ON:  
3 MIN  
ON:  
5 MIN  
ON:  
ON:  
ON:  
Select the sound input from the external source.  
OFF  
OFF  
10 MIN 15 MIN 30 MIN  
Every  
Every  
Every Every Every  
RECORD SETUP  
3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
*
When “EXACT REC” has been set to “ON”, the auto chapter  
interval becomes a little shorter (by a maximum of 1 minute).  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
L
R
V R VIDEO  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EXACT REC  
This function prevents a recording from ending out before it  
is completed by automatically changing the recording mode  
when timer recording (including VCR Plus+, timer recording  
and disc timer recording) is unable to be completed in the  
set recording mode due to insufficient time or available disc  
space. (There may be times when considerable amount of  
disc space remains available compared to recording time.)  
• The EXACT REC function is activated when, during the  
course of recording in the programmed order, the next  
program is unable to be completely recorded due to  
insufficient available disc space in the set recording mode.  
• When the available disc space is extremely small low, the  
recording may not be able to be completed even if the  
EXACT REC function has been set.  
Æ STEREO: Recording standard stereo sound.  
Æ D-MONO: Recording the sound that each channel carries  
as a separate sound.  
D-MONO REC  
When recording a external source in Video mode, you can  
select the sound to record either “L” (left) or “R” (right)  
audio channel.  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
L
R
V R VIDEO  
OFF  
ON  
• The EXACT REC function is not available during Simple  
Recording Timer (page 51).  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• The EXACT REC function is not activated during timer  
recording in the VR mode when the recording mode has  
been set to EP, or during timer recording in the Video  
mode when the recording mode has been set to LP.  
* This does not apply if recording from the DV input.  
RW INIT.  
When you load a new DVD-RW disc, the recorder starts  
initializing automatically. You can select to initialize for VR  
mode or Video mode.  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
* This function works only on DVD-RW discs.  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
L
R
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
V R VIDEO  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
L
R
V R VIDEO  
OFF  
ON  
Æ OFF: Recording continues in the recording mode set  
during timer recording programming.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Æ ON: The recording mode is changed automatically  
during timer recording to prevent the recording  
from ending before it is completed.  
Æ VR: Initialize a disc for VR mode automatically  
Æ VIDEO: Initialize a disc for Video mode automatically  
86  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
86  
03.1.14, 9:28 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record Setup Screen  
Basic Settings of the  
SAP  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
This recorder can record stereo or SAP  
(Separate Audio Program) broadcasts, where  
available. If the broadcast is in stereo, the  
recorder automatically records the stereo  
sound. If the broadcast is in SAP, you can  
record both the MAIN and the SAP mode to  
ON. If the broadcast is in stereo/SAP, you can  
record either the SAP sound by using the  
menu screen to set the SAP mode to ON, or  
stereo sound by setting the SAP mode to  
OFF.  
Record Setup Screen  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
DVD RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD R  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
TITLE  
NOTE  
• During playback, you cannot set each item  
in the SETUP screen. Press ISTOP to stop  
playback.  
SET/  
ENTER  
RETURN  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Example: Set “EXACT REC” to “ON”  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
100  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
REV  
FWD  
display the SETUP screen.  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
PLAY  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
L
R
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
SETUP  
V R VIDEO  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
STOP  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
SAP Broadcast  
OSD LANGUAGE  
SELECT  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
The monitor output listed in the table shows  
the audio output mode. The contents of audio  
recording are different VR mode and Video  
mode. See the table below for details.  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press ' / " to select “RECORD”  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
• The RECORD SETUP screen  
appears.  
Broadcast  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO Recording  
Mode  
Received/SAP  
ON or OFF  
L
R
L
R
• Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
+
MONO L+R  
L+R  
R
L+R  
L
L+R  
R
L+R  
SAP  
L+R  
R
STEREO SAP  
SAP OFF  
L R  
MONO L+R  
L
+
L+R  
SAP  
L+R  
R
L+R  
SAP  
L+R  
L
STEREO SAP  
SAP ON  
L R  
MONO L+R  
L R  
MONO L+R  
L R  
L+R  
3 Press ' / " to select “EXACT  
STEREO  
SAP OFF  
REC”.  
L
L+R  
R
L+R  
L
L+R  
R
STEREO  
SAP ON  
L
+
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO MONO MONO MONO  
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO SAP SAP SAP  
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO MONO MONO MONO  
MONO MONO MONO MONO MONO  
L R MONO MONO MONO MONO  
MONO SAP  
RECORD SETUP  
CHP INT.  
EXACT REC  
R REC START2PRESS 1PRESS  
SAP OFF  
ON:3MIN  
OFF ON  
+
MONO SAP  
SAP ON  
EX. AUDIO  
D-MONO REC  
RW INIT.  
SAP  
STEREO D-MONO  
MONO  
SAP OFF  
L
R
V R VIDEO  
MONO  
SAP ON  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
: When recording in Video mode, the SAP channel is  
recorded on this channel.  
4 Press \ / | to select ONand  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Press SETUP/FUNCTION to exit the  
SETUP screen.  
87  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
87  
03.1.15, 9:47 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Setup Screen  
This section explains each item of disc setup. See Basic  
Settings of the Disc Setup Screenon page 89 to set each  
item.  
Once a disc has been finalized with this recorder, it does  
not have to be finalized again.  
Discs in the VR mode that have been finalized with this  
recorder can be recorded and edited even after they  
have been finalized.  
A disc menu is generated for discs in the Video mode  
that have been finalized with this recorder. Discs that  
have been finalized cannot be used for recording or  
editing.  
Finalizing cannot be selected when a finalized disc has  
been loaded in the recorder. When a DVD-RW disc (VR  
mode) that has been finalized with a different recorder is  
loaded in this recorder, UNDO FINALIZEmay be  
displayed. The disc can be used for recording and  
editing with this recorder if Undo Finalize is performed at  
this time.  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
When you record on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode, you need  
to initialize the disc in VR mode.  
(This is used when you want to erase the entire contents of  
a recorded disc. Check the recorded contents before  
erasing so that disc contents are not erased by mistake.)  
DISC SETUP  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
APRX. 1MIN  
FINALIZE  
PROTECT  
YES  
NO  
OFF  
ON  
Finalizing of VR mode discs can be interrupted even  
when finalizing is in progress. However, starting about 4  
minutes before completion of finalizing, the interrupt  
display is no longer displayed, indicating that finalizing  
can no longer be interrupted. In addition, finalizing can  
also not be interrupted if the interrupt display is not  
displayed from the start of finalizing.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
* This function does not work when the disc is protected.  
* You cannot initialize DVD-R discs for VR mode.  
VIDEO MODE INITIALIZE  
When a DVD-RW disc is used to record in the Video mode,  
the disc must be initialized in the Video mode before you  
start recording. Initializing is also used to erase the entire  
contents of a recorded disc (contents cannot be erased  
from DVD-R discs).  
PROTECT  
This lets you protect a recorded disc. Disc protect prevents  
the contents of that disc from being altered by recording or  
editing. In addition, this procedure is used to cancel disc  
protect. Once disc protect is canceled, it can again be used  
for recording and editing.  
DISC SETUP  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
VIDEO MODE INITIALIZE  
DISC SETUP  
APRX. 1MIN  
YES  
OFF  
NO  
ON  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
VIDEO MODE INITIALIZE  
FINALIZE  
PROTECT  
PROTECT  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SELECT  
RETURN  
* DVD-R discs cannot be initialized.  
Æ OFF: Disc protect is canceled and the disc can be used  
for editing and recording.  
Æ ON: Disc protect is activated and the disc cannot be  
edited or recorded.  
* Discs for which disc protect has been set cannot be  
initialized.  
* Disc protect is only available for DVD-RW discs (VR  
mode).  
FINALIZE  
When a disc recorded in the Video mode is played back  
with another DVD player or when a disc recorded in the  
VR mode is not played back with another DVD-RW-  
compatible player, finalize the disc so that it can be  
played back.  
Several minutes to about 1 hour may be required for  
finalizing processing. (Processing takes longer time when  
there is a large amount of available disc space on DVD-  
RW discs (VR mode).)  
* Protect processing may take up to about 2 minutes  
depending on the recording status of the disc such as if  
the disc contains a large number of titles.  
DISC SETUP  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
VIDEO MODE INITIALIZE  
FINALIZE  
APRX. 38MIN  
YES  
NO  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
88  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
88  
03.1.9, 7:51 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc Setup Screen  
4 Press \ to select YESand then  
Basic Settings of the Disc  
Setup Screen  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
press SET/ENTER.  
The initializing is starts.  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW  
DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
DISC SETUP  
VR MODE INITIALIZING  
TITLE  
NOTE  
During playback, you cannot set each item  
in the SETUP screen. Press ISTOP to stop  
playback.  
SET/  
FINALIZE  
PROTECT  
RETURN  
ENTER  
OFF  
ON  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Example: Select VR MODE INITIALIZE”  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
The screen in step 2 appears after  
initializing.  
Press SETUP/FUNCTION to exit the  
SETUP screen.  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
100  
REV  
FWD  
display the SETUP screen.  
PLAY  
SETUP  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
STOP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
OSD LANGUAGE  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TV CONTROL  
2 Press ' / " to select DISCand  
then press SET/ENTER.  
The DISC SETUP screen appears.  
Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
DISC SETUP  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
VIDEO MODE INITIALIZE  
FINALIZE  
PROTECT  
OFF  
ON  
SELECT  
RETURN  
3 Press ' / " to select VR MODE  
INITIALIZEand then press |.  
DISC SETUP  
VR MODE INITIALIZE  
APRX. 1MIN  
FINALIZE  
PROTECT  
YES  
NO  
OFF  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
89  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
89  
03.1.14, 9:29 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option Setup Screen  
This section explains each item of option setup. See Basic  
Settings of the Option Setup Screenon page 92 to set  
DUBBING  
When recording material played back with this recorder  
using other equipment, the contents displayed on the TV  
screen may also be recorded. This function is for preventing  
this from happening.  
each item.  
CLOCK DISP  
This function turns on or off the clock indicator on the Front  
Panel Display to save electricity when the recorder is turned  
off.  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
ON  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
ON  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ENTER  
ON  
RETURN  
Æ OFF: On screen display displayed when playing back a  
disc is displayed to match switching of the on-  
screen display (page 28).  
ENTER  
SELECT  
Æ OFF: Turns off the clock indicator on the Front Panel  
Display to save electricity when the recorder is  
turned off. The STANDBY indicator lights up when  
the recorder is turned off.  
Æ ON: On screen display displayed when playing back a  
disc is canceled so that only the played back  
material is output.  
* Some error messages are displayed.  
Æ ON: Turns on the clock indicator on the Front Panel  
Display when the recorder is turned off.  
DV LINK  
When recording with this recorder by connecting a digital  
camcorder using the DV IN/OUT terminal, the digital  
camcorder can be controlled with the remote control of this  
recorder.  
POWER OFF  
When you forget to turn off power or do not operate the  
recorder, the power is turned off automatically about 3 hours  
later to save electricity.  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
OFF  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ENTER  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
* Refer to page 95 for information on the procedure when  
connecting this recorder with a digital camcorder.  
Æ MAN.: The recorder does not turn off until the POWER is  
pressed.  
Æ OFF: Set to OFF when the digital camcorder does not  
operate properly when the recorder is connected to  
a digital camcorder and controlled with the remote  
control of this recorder.  
Æ AUTO: Turns off the power automatically when you do not  
operate the recorder for about 3 hours.  
Æ ON: A digital camcorder connected to this recorder can  
be controlled with the remote control of this  
recorder.  
* Discs cannot be played back when it is set to ONand  
DV input has been selected.  
90  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
90  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option Setup Screen  
DV AUDIO IN  
You can select the audio to be recorded when recording  
material from a digital camcorder using the DV IN/OUT  
terminal.  
3DY/C  
The 3D Y/C separation circuit is a function that lets you  
enjoy clear viewing and recording of TV broadcasts or  
recorded material from equipment connected to the external  
input.  
OPTION SETUP  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
ON  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
ON  
MAN. AUTO  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
Æ ST. 1: Original audio  
Æ ST. 2: Overdubbed audio  
Æ Monaural audio cannot be input through the DV IN/OUT  
terminal.  
* The DV input audio settings are disabled when the audio  
output of the digital camcorder that is connected is set to  
16 bits.  
Æ OFF: Set this function to OFFwhen images appear  
incorrectly during reception of a weak broadcast  
signal, or when the picture is distorted when a  
video deck or video game machine is connected to  
the external input jack of this recorder.  
Æ ON: Enables recording with higher picture quality  
(Normally, this function is set to ON).  
* This function is not activated for DV input or S-Video.  
BLUE SCREEN  
This function automatically switches material containing  
unwanted noise to a blue screen when a channel for which  
there is no broadcast or a channel for which broadcasting  
has ended has been selected.  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
ON  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ENTER  
ON  
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
Æ OFF: The Blue Screen function does not work.  
Æ ON: The Blue Screen function works.  
* The display may switch to the blue screen when material  
has been input from external input that involves a special  
playback format. Set this function to OFFif this happens.  
91  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
91  
03.1.14, 9:30 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option Setup Screen  
Basic Settings of the  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
Option Setup Screen  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
DVD RW  
DVD RW  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
DVD VIDEO  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
FUNCTION  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
AUDIO CD  
TITLE  
SET/  
ENTER  
NOTE  
RETURN  
During playback, you cannot set each item  
in the SETUP screen. Press ISTOP to stop  
playback.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
REC MODE  
Example: Set CLOCK DISPto ON”  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
100  
REV  
FWD  
1 Press SETUP/FUNCTION to  
PLAY  
display the SETUP screen.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
SETUP  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
PLAYBACK  
RECORD  
DISC  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
CLOCK  
CHANNEL  
OPTION  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
OSD LANGUAGE  
TV CONTROL  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2 Press ' / " to select OPTION”  
and then press SET/ENTER.  
The OPTION SETUP screen appears.  
Press RETURN to return to the  
previous screen.  
3 Press ' / " to select CLOCK  
DISP.  
OPTION SETUP  
CLOCK DISP  
POWER OFF  
DUBBING  
OFF  
MAN. AUTO  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
DV LINK  
DV AUDIO INST.1 ST.2  
BLUE SCREEN OFF  
ON  
3D Y/C  
OFF  
ENTER  
ON  
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
4 Press \ / | to select ONand  
then press SET/ENTER.  
Each time \ / | is pressed, the mode  
toggles between ONand OFF.  
Press SETUP/FUNCTION to exit the  
SETUP screen.  
92  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
92  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
Playing 2 channel audio with an  
Analog Connector  
Playing Dolby Digital  
(5.1 channel) and DTS audio with a  
Digital Connection  
Connecting an amplifier with a Dolby Digital/DTS digital  
surround processor or a Dolby Digital/DTS digital  
surround decoder to the recorders optical digital jack  
provides richer, more powerful audio play.  
To use DTS digital surround, press AUDIO to select DTS  
audio.  
I Connection to a processor or amplifier with a optical  
digital input jack  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
COMONENT  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
PR  
To DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL terminal  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially available)  
To optical digital  
input terminal  
NOTE  
When connecting the audio equipment to the analog  
connection, we recommend that you set the  
DD LEVELin PLAYBACK SETUPto OFF(See page 81).  
Dolby Digital (5.1ch)/  
DTS processor or amplifier  
Important!  
When using this connection, set the Digital OUTin  
PLAYBACK SETUPto DIGITAL(See page 81).  
NOTE  
To play a disc recorded with DTS, you need to use DTS  
processor or amplifier.  
This connection is not possible if the processor or  
amplifier to which you want to connect does not have a  
optical digital input jack.  
Refer to the operation manual for the processor or  
amplifier for information about connecting to it.  
93  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
93  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
I Digital Connection to Audio Equipment or MD Player  
without a Dolby Digital Decoder  
Audio CD or Video CD  
You can enjoy these discs by playing them back the  
ordinary playback procedure. (The normal audio output  
is not played back for discs recorded with DTS.)  
DVD Video Disc  
Playing 2 channel audio with a  
Digital Connection  
IN FROM  
ANTENNA  
LINE  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
PB  
There is no audio signal generated for DVD video discs  
recorded with DTS. A processor or amplifier equipped  
with a DTS Surround decoder function is required to enjoy  
DTS audio.  
PR  
To DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL terminal  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially available)  
To optical digital  
input terminal  
Audio equipment with  
optical digital input terminal  
Important!  
When connecting the audio equipment to the digital  
connection, set the Digital OUTin PLAYBACK  
SETUPto PCM(See page 81).  
NOTE  
No sound will come out from the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL  
terminal.  
Digital Connection to an MD to Record a CD  
When you are using a digital connection to record the  
contents of a CD to an MD, the track numbers of the  
CD may not match the track numbers recorded to the  
MD.  
94  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
94  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
I Input/Output of Video, Audio and Data Signals  
Recording by Connecting with a  
Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK  
Æ Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded with this recorder.  
Æ Video and audio signals from TV programs, external  
inputs, CDs or Video CDs cannot be output.  
Æ Video and audio signals of protected material or  
copy-oncematerial cannot be output.  
Æ Video and audio signals of protected material or  
copy-oncematerial cannot be recorded.  
Æ Monaural audio cannot be input through the DV IN/  
OUT terminal.  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
DVD RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD R  
This function lets you make high picture quality and high  
sound quality recordings by connecting with a digital  
camcorder using the DV IN/OUT terminal (i.LINK). You can  
record material from this recorder with a digital camcorder,  
or record material from a digital camcorder with this  
recorder.  
In addition, you can also record while controlling the digital  
camcorder with the remote control of this recorder (DV  
uptake).  
I Audio Mode  
Digital camcorders typically have the following two audio  
modes.  
* i.LINK is a function that lets you control other equipment  
by input and output of video, audio, data and control  
signals between equipment having an i.LINK jack.  
* i.Link refers to the IEEE1394-1995 industry specification  
Æ 16-bit (48 kHz)  
Although this yields high sound quality, only one stereo  
audio signal can be processed.  
Æ 12-bit (32 kHz)  
Two stereo signals can be processed. In general,  
overdubbed audio is recorded in Stereo 2.  
Æ This recorder allows listening or recording of either  
Stereo 1 or Stereo 2 audio if the input audio is in the  
12-bit audio mode.  
and extensions thereof. The  
logo is used for products  
compliant with the i.Link standard.  
DV IN/OUT Terminal  
I About the Connected Equipment  
When this recorder is connected with a DV-format  
camcorder using a DV cable, you can record and edit with  
minimal deterioration of picture and sound quality using a  
digital signal.  
Æ Only the 16-bit audio mode is output from this  
recorder.  
Æ This recorder is unable to process 44.1 kHz input  
audio signals.  
NOTE  
Connecting Using the DV IN/  
OUT Terminal (i.LINK)  
The DV IN/OUT terminal of this recorder only enables  
input and output of DV-format camcorders (DVC-SD  
signals). It is not compatible with satellite receivers or  
Digital VHS video recorders since they employ a different  
format.  
Refer to the users manual provided with the camcorder for  
information on the procedure for connecting the camcorder  
with this recorder.  
When this recorder is connected with a camcorder  
equipped with a DV terminal, the signal may not be input  
to this recorder depending on the camcorder. When this  
happens, use an analog connection (page 98).  
The DV IN/OUT terminal is not compatible with connec-  
tion to a PC.  
This recorder  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
STANDBY  
TIMER  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
This recorder cannot be controlled from other equipment  
by using the DV IN/OUT terminal.  
Only one camcorder can be connected to this recorder  
using the DV IN/OUT terminal.  
To DV IN/OUT  
terminal  
Digital camcorder  
Connect this recorder and the camcorder directly. The DV  
signal will not be input if the camcorder is connected to  
this recorder through other equipment equipped with a  
DV IN/OUT terminal.  
When two of these recorders are connected using the DV  
IN/OUT jack, one cannot be used to control the other.  
Signals may not be able to be output or control may not  
be possible from this recorder in the case of some digital  
camcorders (page 96).  
To DV terminal  
DV cable  
(Commercially available)  
In this connection, set the power  
switch of the digital camcorder to  
"Video (Playback)" and stop the  
camcorder.  
95  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
95  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
3 Press INPUT.  
Recording with this recorder  
(DV Uptake)  
You can record images from a digital camcorder connected  
to the DV IN/OUT terminal of this recorder. You can also  
control the operation of the camcorder with the remote  
control provided with this recorder, making it easy to record  
material from a camcorder onto a disc.  
The setting changes in the order of DV (DV Input),  
L 1 (External Input 1), L 2 (External Input 2), L 3  
(External Input 3), Channel and then back to DV (DV  
Input) each time this is pressed.  
When DV LINKis set to ON, the digital  
camcorder can be controlled with the remote control  
of this recorder.  
The following buttons can be used:  
|PLAY, FWD  
Record material from a camcorder after first setting the DV  
AUDIO IN(page 91) of OPTION SETUP.  
,
REV, ISTOP, SLOW and  
STILL/PAUSE.  
NOTE  
DV LINK  
Material protected with a copy guard cannot be recorded.  
Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded.  
REC  
DISC REC  
Discs cannot be played back when DV LINKis set to  
ONduring DV input. Set the DV LINKto OFFwhen  
you want to play back recorded material.  
The video and audio signals of Audio CDs or Video CDs  
are not output.  
4 Begin playback of the digital camcorder.  
5
Press ÆREC where you want to start record-  
ing.  
This recorder begins to record.  
The video and audio signals of protected material or  
copy-once material are not output.  
Recording by this recorder pauses if there is a  
portion of the digital camcorder playback where  
nothing has been recorded or playback is stopped  
during recording. When a recorded portion of the  
playback is again played back, pause is canceled  
and recording resumes.  
1 Setup  
1
Connect the digital camcorder to the DV IN/OUT  
termial.  
Set the power switch of the camcorder to Video  
(Playback)and connect while it is stopped.  
6 Pause recording (as necessary).  
When DV LINKis ON: Press ÆREC.  
This recorder  
When DV LINKis OFF: Press STILL/PAUSE.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DV LINK  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
ENTER  
REC  
DISC STOP  
DISC REC  
To DV IN/OUT  
terminal  
7 Stop (end) recording.  
Digital camcorder  
When DV LINKis ON: Press SET/ENTER.  
WhenDV LINKisOFF: Press ISTOP.  
To DV terminal  
DV cable  
(Commercially available)  
Refer to the section on Troubleshooting(page 100) when DV  
uptake does not function properly.  
Important!  
2 Place a disc for recording in the recorder.  
Abnormal images may be recorded when any of the  
following occur during DV uptake.  
When connected equipment plays back a portion  
where nothing is recorded  
When the DV cable is disconnected or the camcorder  
power is turned off during DV uptake  
When playback from the camcorder is stopped  
2 Select the external input audio.  
Before starting recording, check the setting of DV  
AUDIO IN(page 91).  
Monaural audio cannot be input through the DV IN/  
OUT terminal.  
96  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
96  
03.1.14, 9:30 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Only DVC-SD signals can be input from the DV IN/OUT  
terminal of this recorder.  
Images protected with a copy guard are not output to the  
DV IN/OUT terminal.  
There are some digital camcorders that cannot be  
operated with the remote control of this recorder even if  
DV LINKis set to ON. Set DV LINKto OFFwhen  
this happens (page 90).  
When connecting a digital camcorder to this recorder, set  
the power switch of the digital camcorder to Playback  
(Video)and press ISTOP. If the camcorder is  
connected with the power switch set to RECORD  
(Camera)or while it is playing back, DV Link will not  
function properly.  
This recorder cannot be controlled from the outside using  
the DV IN/OUT terminal.  
When two of these recorders are connected using the DV  
IN/OUT jack, one cannot be used to control the other.  
Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded.  
Video and audio signals of protected material or copy-  
oncematerial cannot be output.  
When disc information (page 28) is displayed, that  
information is also displayed on images output from the  
digital camcorder. Turn off the display of disc information  
when recording images output from the DV IN/OUT  
terminal with a digital camcorder.  
The DV IN/OUT terminal of this recorder functions as a  
connection terminal for digital camcorders. Images may  
not be able to be taken up or output properly if other  
equipment (such as PC) is connected to this terminal.  
Since recording is performed in 30 seconds units (1  
minute units in the LP mode) when recording in the Video  
mode, recording may continue briefly after it is finished.  
The DV output cannot be used during progressive  
playback (page 80).  
Discs cannot be played back while DV LINKis set to  
ONduring DV input. If you want to play back a disc,  
set DV LINKto OFFafter recording is finished.  
This recorder is only able to output 16-bit audio.  
Important!  
Proper images may not be recorded when any of the  
following occur during DV uptake.  
When the digital camcorder plays back a portion  
where nothing is recorded  
When the DV cable is disconnected or the camcorder  
power is turned off during recording  
When playback from the camcorder is stopped  
Recording with a Digital  
Camcorder  
When playback is started with this recorder after the  
channel has been set to a channel other than DV, the DV IN/  
OUT terminal functions as an external input jack. (When DV  
input has been selected, there is no signal output from the  
DV IN/OUT terminal.)  
1 Connect the digital camcorder to the DV IN/  
OUT terminal on this recorder.  
This recorder  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
To DV IN/OUT  
terminal  
Digital camcorder  
To DV terminal  
DV cable  
(Commercially available)  
2 Play back the recorded material with this  
recorder.  
The material played back with this recorder is  
output to the digital camcorder.  
97  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
97  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
2 Select the external input audio.  
Refer to the section on EX. AUDIO(page 86) or  
the section on D-MONO REC(page 86).  
Recording Using an  
Analog Connection with a  
Digital Camcorder  
3 Press INPUT to set to the channel of the  
DVD RW  
DVD RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD R  
external input.  
VR MODE  
The setting changes in the order of DV (DV Input),  
L 1 (External Input 1), L 2 (External Input 2), L 3  
(External Input 3), Channel and then back to DV (DV  
Input) each time this is pressed.  
Material from a digital camcorder can be recorded with this  
recorder using an analog connection between this recorder  
and the digital camcorder.  
4 Perform the procedure for recording with this  
NOTE  
It is recommended to use the DV IN/OUT terminal when  
connecting a digital camcorder equipped with a DV  
terminal. (Refer to the section on Recording by Connect-  
ing with a Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK(page 95).)  
More vivid images can be viewed by connecting the S-  
VIDEO IN jack on this recorder with the S-VIDEO OUT  
jack on the camcorder using an S-VIDEO cable.  
Some camcorders may be required to be connected  
using a special cable.  
recorder.  
Refer to the operation manual provided with the  
camcorder for further information on the procedure for  
connecting the camcorder.  
Recording with this Recorder  
1 Setup  
1 Connect the equipment to IN 2 of this recorder.  
2 Load a disc for recording in the recorder.  
98  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
98  
03.1.9, 7:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Audio Equipment  
Recording Material from  
External Equipment  
DVD RW  
VR MODE  
DVD RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD R  
You can record material from equipment connected to one of  
the external input jacks of this recorder (IN 1, IN 2 or IN 3).  
1 Setup  
1 Connect the equipment to an external input jack  
of this recorder.  
The Recorder  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
IN jacks  
Video/Audio cable  
(Supplied)  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
External equipment  
2 Place a disc for recording in this recorder.  
2 Select the external input audio.  
Refer to the section on EX. AUDIO(page 86) or  
the section on D-MONO REC(page 86).  
3 Press INPUT.  
The setting changes in the order of DV (DV Input),  
L 1 (External Input 1), L 2 (External Input 2), L 3  
(External Input 3), Channel and then back to DV (DV  
Input) each time this is pressed.  
4 Perform the procedure for recording with this  
recorder.  
NOTE  
Material protected with a copy guard cannot be  
recorded. In addition, proper images may not be able to  
be viewed even when only viewing such material without  
recording.  
99  
DV_RW2U#p86-99.p65  
99  
03.1.9, 7:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
The following problems do not always denote a broken this recorder.  
Perform the checks listed below before calling service.  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
The recorder does not switch on  
• Is the power cord firmly plugged into the power outlet?  
The disc is automatically ejected after  
closing the disc tray  
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up)  
Take out the disc and clean it  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this recorder  
• Make sure that the disc is playable  
No picture  
• Make sure that the cables are connected correctly  
• Make sure that the connected TV and the AV receiver is set to the correct input  
Take out the disc and clean it  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this recorder  
The recorder does not play a disc  
Take out the disc and clean it  
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up)  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this recorder  
• Remove the dew in the recorder  
• Check that the disc is NTSC  
Make sure that “DV LINK” in “OPTION SETUP” to “OFF” when selecting DV input  
Settings have disappeared  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) for more than about  
1 hour while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. Make sure that  
you turn off the recorder before unplugging the power cord  
Screen goes blank and operation buttons do • Press ISTOP and restart playback  
not work  
Turn off the power and turn on the power again  
No sound and/or picture from a camcorder  
connected to the DV IN/OUT terminal  
Since played back material is not output when DV input has been selected, select  
another channel when you want to playback recorded material.  
• Make sure that “PROGRESSIVE” in “PLAYBACK SETUP” to “OFF”  
The remote control does not work  
• Check that the Tamper Proof function is active  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder  
• Use the remote control within its operating range  
• Replace the batteries  
No sound or sound is distorted  
• Make sure that the volume of the amplifier/receiver or TV is not set to minimum  
• There is no sound during still mode, slow motion playback, fast forward and  
fast rewind  
DVD audio recorded in DTS is only output from the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL  
terminal. Connect a DTS-compatible digital amplifier or decoder to this recorder.  
• Check that the audio cable is connected correctly  
• Check that the cable plugs are clean  
Take out the disc and clean it  
• Audio may not be able to be output depending on the audio recording  
status, such as when audio other than an audio signal or non-standard audio  
is recorded for the audio content recorded on a disc.  
The picture from the external input is  
distorted  
• If the signal is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder.  
Connect the component directly to your TV  
The screen is stretched vertically or  
horizontally  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the  
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with ID-1, the screen  
does not wide mode  
• Check that the aspect ratio settings of your TV  
A disc recorded using this recorder cannot • Check that the disc is finalized  
be played back on another player  
• Some player will not play even a finalized disc  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be RW compat-  
ible in order to play the disc  
The recorder does not record  
• Check that the blank space on the disc remains  
• Check that the disc is protected  
• Check that the number of titles on the disc has already reached 99  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected  
• Check that there wasn’t a power failure during the timer recording  
• Check that the 2 timer programs may have overlapped  
100  
DV_RW2U#p100-104.p65  
100  
03.1.9, 7:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Can not control your TV using this remote  
control  
Check that you entered the correct code for your TV  
Unable to Record, Timer Record or  
Automatically Record from an External Input  
Place a disc for recording (DVD-R or DVD-RW) in the recorder and after  
confirming that disc identification (loading) has been completed, perform the  
respective procedures for recording, timer recording or automatically  
recording from an external input.  
Nothing is Recorded Following Recording  
There is nothing recorded when a channel has been recorded that is not  
broadcasting (or for which broadcasting has ended). There may also be  
nothing recorded when a channel with poor reception has been recorded.  
Unable to Record onto a DVD-RW Disc in  
the Video Mode  
Use a Ver 1.1 disc or later. (The version is usually indicated on the back of  
the disc jacket).  
Images from a Camcorder Connected to the Recorded material protected with a copy guard cannot be viewed.  
DV IN/OUT terminal are not Displayed, are Check the connections.  
Displayed without Sound or the Camera  
does not Operate Properly  
Turn the power OFF and then turn it back ON again.  
Reconnect the DV cable.  
Try setting DV LINKto OFF.  
Switch DV AUDIO IN.  
A Camcorder Connected to the DV IN/OUT Set DV LINKto ON.  
terminal cannot be Controlled with this  
Product  
Some types of camcorders may not be able to be controlled.  
Images are Distorted (Appear Improperly) Switch 3D Y/Cto OFF.  
during External Input or Broadcasts with  
Poor Reception  
There is no On-screen Display during  
Playback  
Check whether or not DUBBINGis set to ON. When this is set to ON, the  
on-screen display is forcibly set to OFF during playback.  
NOTE  
This recorder is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by external electrical noise  
or interference. If this should happen, unplug the product and plug it in again after a few minutes.  
Press RESET with a toothpick or other narrow rod-like object (nonmetal) when the recorder does not operate properly even  
after the power has been turned off and then back on again.  
Since the clock, channel, timer recording programs and other data in memory are also reset when RESET has been  
pressed, they must be set again.  
EZ Set Up function starts automatically when RESET is pressed.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
TIMER  
STANDBY  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
Service Informatino (For the U.S.)  
For the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center, or to obtain product literature, accessories, supplies or  
customer assistance, please call 1-800-BE-SHARP(1-800-237-4277) or visit SHARPs website (http://www.sharp-usa.com).  
1. Do not attempt to service this product yourself. Instead, unplug it and contact a qualified service technician. (See CON-  
SUMER LIMITED WARRANTY at the end of this manual.)  
2. Be sure the service technician uses authorized replacement parts or their equivalents. Unauthorized parts may cause fire,  
electrical shock, or other hazards.  
3. Following any service or repair, be sure the service technician performs safety checks to certify that this product is in safe  
operating order.  
101  
DV_RW2U#p100-104.p65  
101  
03.1.9, 7:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Angle  
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have been simultaneously shot from  
a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side,  
from the right side, etc.). With such discs, you can select the angle on Function Control  
Screen to view the scene from different angles.  
Chapter  
Number  
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. A title is subdivided into many sections,  
each of which is numbered, and specific parts of video presentations can be searched  
quickly using these numbers.  
Digital Gamma Corrects for gradations in dark areas of images to make images clearer.  
Digital Super  
Picture  
Enhances the fine detail of the image and outlines of the objects it contains.  
DiscNavi  
DiscNavi displays a list of the first scene of each titles when playing a DVD-R/DVD-RW  
disc recorded in this recorder.  
Dolby Digital  
(5.1 channel)  
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc. that gives movie theater ambi-  
ence to audio output when the product is connected to a Dolby Digital 5.1 channel  
processor or amplifier.  
Dolby Digital  
output level  
Setting that increases the average volume of Dolby Digital audio when playing a DVD.  
DTS  
This is a digital sound system developed by Digital Theater Systems for use in cinemas.  
This system uses 6 audio channels and provides accurate sound field positioning and  
realistic acoustics. (By connecting a DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen  
to DTS Digital Surround sound.)  
Exact Rec  
This function automatically changes the recording mode to prevent recordings from  
running out before they are finished due to a lack of available disc space by comparing  
the available disc space and the time required for the timer recording.  
EZ Set Up  
Tuner channels and clock are automatically set for both Air and Cable channels.  
Finalization  
Finalization is required to play DVD discs with another DVD player or DVD video-  
compatible PC.  
Initialization  
Initialization is required when using DVD-RW discs in the Video mode.  
Letter Box  
Screen size that cuts off the top and bottom of the image to allow playing of Wide (16:9)  
software on a connected 4:3 TV.  
4:3 LB  
Linear PCM  
Sound  
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio CDs.  
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is  
recorded at between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)  
MP3  
One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. This format compresses sound to  
about 1/10, without impairing the original sound quality.  
Original (ORG) An image of title created when they are recorded the disc is called Original.  
102  
DV_RW2U#p100-104.p65  
102  
03.1.9, 7:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Pan Scan  
Screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow playing of Wide (16:9) software  
on a connected 4:3 TV.  
4:3 PS  
Playlist (PL)  
Playback  
Titles for editing created based on an original are called Playlist.  
This is recorded on a video CD (version 2.0). The scenes or information to be viewed (or  
Control (PBC) listened to) can be selected into actively with the TV monitor by looking at the menu  
shown on the TV monitor.  
Region  
Number  
Number identifying a geographic region of compatibility for a DVD.  
Subtitles  
These are the printed lines appearing at the bottom of the screen which translate or  
transcribe the dialog. They are recorded on DVD discs.  
Time Number  
Title Menu  
Title Number  
This indicates the play time which has elapsed from the start of a disc or a title. It can  
be used to find a specific scene quickly. (It may not work with some discs.)  
This is a menu displayed by some DVDs for selection of chapters and subtitle set. The  
title menu is also called a top menu.  
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. When a disc contains two or more movies,  
these movies are numbered as title 1, title 2, etc.  
Track Number These numbers are assigned to the tracks which are recorded on video CDs and Audio  
CDs. They enable specific tracks to be located quickly.  
VBR  
VBR is the abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate control. This feature performs control by  
varying the bit rate (the amount of code transferred in a fixed period of time) by assign-  
ing a larger amount of code to complex video images such as sections containing rapid  
movement or sections containing sudden changes in color, and assigning a smaller  
amount of code in the opposite cases.  
Video Mode  
VR Mode  
This recording format is compatible with commercially available DVD players and DVD-  
ROM drive.  
This recording format is the basic DVD-RW recording format, and lets you enjoy the  
various editing functions available with this recorder.  
103  
DV_RW2U#p100-104.p65  
103  
03.1.9, 7:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
General  
Input/Output  
Power supply: ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
(Normal):..................................... 40 W  
Power consumption  
(Standby): ................................... 0.9 W (During the Front Panel  
Display is off.)  
VHF/UHF antenna input/  
output terminal: ........................... 75(F-shape Connector)  
Video input: ..................................... Input 1, 3(rear), 2 (front)  
Input level: ............................... 1 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Video output:  
Dimensions: .................................... Approx. 430 mm × 82 mm × 361 mm  
(W × H × D)  
Output level: ............................ 1 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
S-Video input: ................................. Input 1, 3(rear), 2 (front)  
Y-Input level: ............................ 1 Vp-p (75)  
C-Input level: ........................... 0.286 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks: ...................................... 4 pin mini DIN  
S-Video output:  
Y-Output level: ......................... 1 Vp-p (75)  
C-Output level: ........................ 0.286 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks: ...................................... 4 pin mini DIN  
Component video output:  
Approx. 1615/16" × 31/4" × 141/4  
"
Weight: ............................................ Approx. 5.1 kg (11.3 lbs)  
Operating temperature ................... 5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)  
Storage temperature: ...................... –20°C to 55°C (–4°F to 131°F)  
Operating humidity: ........................ 5% to 80%(no condensation)  
Discs Played: .................................. DVD Video, DVD-R/RW, Audio  
CD (CD-DA), Video CD  
CD-R/RW (CD-DA, MP-3 file  
format)  
TV systems: ..................................... NTSC system, 525 lines, 60  
fields  
Output level: ............................ Y: 1 Vp-p (75)  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Audio input: ..................................... Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R  
Input level: ............................... 2 V rms (Input impedance: more  
than 22 k)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Audio output: .................................. L/R  
Input level: ............................... 2 V rms (Output impedance:  
less than 1.5 k)  
Jack: ........................................ RCA jack  
Digital audio optical output:  
Terminal: .................................. Square Optical terminal  
DV input/output:  
Recording  
Recording format: ........................... DVD-Video Recording  
(VR mode)  
DVD-VIDEO (Video mode)  
Recording discs: ............................. DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
Video recording format:  
Sampling frequency: ............... 13.5 MHz  
Compression format: ............... MPEG  
Audio recording format:  
Sampling frequency: ............... 48 kHz  
Compression format: ............... Dolby Digital  
Recording time (Using the 4.7 GB disc):  
DVD-RW (VR mode): ............... FINE: Approx. 60 minutes  
SP: Approx. 120 minutes  
Terminal: .................................. 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394  
standard)  
LASER Specification  
LP: Approx. 240 minutes  
EP: Approx. 360 minutes  
Wave length: ................................... DVD: 650 nm  
CD: 780 nm  
DVD-R/RW (Video mode): ............... FINE: Approx. 60 minutes  
SP: Approx. 120 minutes  
Laser power: ................................... DVD: 70 mW  
CD: 108 mW  
LP: Approx. 240 minutes  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Tuner  
Channel coverage: ......................... VHF 2-13  
UHF 14-69  
CATV 1-125  
Timer  
Programs: ....................................... 1 year/8 programs  
Clock: .............................................. Quartz lock  
(12-hour digital display)  
Memory backup: ............................. Approx. 1 hour  
104  
DV_RW2U#p100-104.p65  
104  
03.1.14, 9:33 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESPAÑOL  
(Guía de operación rápida)  
MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES .... 107  
Guía de operación rápida en español ............. 108  
Conexión básica................................................................. 108  
EZ Set Up........................................................................... 108  
Reproducción de DVD........................................................ 109  
Reproduce solamente los discos para reproducción .... 109  
Avance rápido/Retroceso rápido ........................................ 109  
Función de avance rápido/retroceso rápido  
(búsqueda) sobre la grabadora ................................. 109  
Omisión (Avance/Retroceso) ............................................. 110  
Cámara lenta...................................................................... 110  
Avance de cuadro, Imagen fija/pausa ................................ 110  
Grabación básica ............................................................... 111  
105  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p105.p65  
105  
03.1.15, 11:23 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Para futura referencia, anote los números de modelo y de serie  
(indicados en la parte posterior este producto) en el espacio provisto.  
No. de modelo: DV-RW2U  
No. de serie:  
AVISO: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O ELECTROCHOQUE  
NO EXPONGA ESTE APARATO A LA HUMEDAD.  
Este símbolo previene al usuario  
del voltaje aislado dentro de la  
unidad que puede provocar  
descargas eléctricas peligrosas.  
PRECAUCION  
PELIGRO DE DESCARGA  
ELECTRICA NO ABRIR  
PRECAUCION:  
TPARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA, NO  
Este símbolo advierte al usuario  
que existen instrucciones de  
QUITE LA CUBIERTA. EL USUARIO NO DEBERA DAR NINGUN  
operación y de mantenimiento en la  
TIPO DE SERVICIO A NINGUNA PARTE INTERNA. DEBERA SER  
literatura incluida en esta unidad.  
REALIZADO SOLO POR PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CALIFICADO.  
“ADVERTENCIA—Las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de  
Comunicaciones) estipulan que cualquier modificación o cambio a este  
equipo no aprobado expresamente por el fabricante podrá anular la  
autorización del usuario para operar este equipo”.  
INFORMACION  
Este equipo se ha sometido a todo tipo de pruebas y cumple con las normas establecidas para dispositivo  
digital de Clase B, de conformidad con la Parte 15 de las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de  
Comunicaciones). Estas reglas están diseñadas para asegurar una protección razonable contra  
interferencias perjudiciales en las instalaciones residenciales. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede emitir  
energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza debidamente, es decir, conforme a las instrucciones,  
podrían producirse interferencias perjudiciales en las radiocomunicaciones. Sin embargo, no se garantiza  
que estas interferencias no se produzcan en una instalación determinada. Si este equipo ocasiona  
interferencias en la recepción de radio o televisión, lo cual puede comprobarse con sólo apagar y encender  
el equipo, intente corregir el problema mediante una o una combinación de las siguientes medidas:  
—Reoriente la antena receptora o cámbiela de lugar.  
—Aumente la separación entre el equipo y el receptor.  
—Enchufe el equipo a una toma de corriente situada en un circuito distinto del receptor.  
—Consulte a su distribuidor o a un técnico experto en radio/televisión.  
PRECAUCION:  
ESTA UNIDAD HA SIDO CLASIFICADA COMO PRODUCTO CLASS 1 LASER.  
EL USO DE MANDOS O AJUSTES O LA REALIZACION DE PROCEDIMIENTOS DISTINTOS DE LOS  
INDICADOS EN LA PRESENTE IMPLICA EL RIESGO DE EXPOSICION A UNA RADIACION PELIGROSA.  
COMO LOS RAYOS LASER UTILIZADOS EN ESTA UNIDAD PUEDEN RESULTAR PERJUDICIALES PARA SUS  
OJOS, NO INTENTE DESARMAR EL GABINETE.  
SOLICITE EL SERVICIO UNICAMENTE A PERSONAL CUALIFICADO.  
Aviso al instalador de sistemas CATV:  
Este aviso tiene la finalidad de llamar la atención del instalador de sistemas CATV para que tenga en cuenta  
el Artículo 820-40 de NEC, que ofrece instrucciones para realizar una conexión a tierra apropiada y, en  
particular, especifica que el cable de puesta a tierra deberá conectarse al sistema de puesta a tierra del  
edificio tan cerca del punto de entrada del cable como sea posible.  
®
Como socio de ENERGY STAR , SHARP ha determinado que este producto cumple con las pautas de ENERGY  
®
STAR para uso eficiente de energía. ENERGY STAR es una marca registrada estadounidense.  
106  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p106-107.p65  
106  
03.1.14, 2:42 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES  
14. Puesta a tierra de la antena exterior Si una antena exterior  
PRECAUCIÓN:Lea todas estas instrucciones  
o sistema de cables esta conectado al producto, asegúrese de  
antes de utilizar este producto y guárdelas para  
que la antena o sistema de cables esté puesto a tierra de forma  
que proporcione cierta protección contra sobretensiones y  
acumulaciones de cargas estáticas. El estatuto 810 del Código  
Eléctrico Nacional ANSI/NFPA 70 proporciona información relativa  
a la puesta a tierra adecuada del poste y de la estructura de soporte,  
puesta a tierra del cable de entrada a una unidad de descarga de  
antena, tamaño de los conductores de puesta a tierra, ubicación  
de la unidad de descarga de antena, conexión a los electrodos de  
puesta a tierra y los requisitos correspondientes al electrodo de  
puesta a tierra. Refiérase al diagrama siguiente.  
consultarlas posteriormente.  
La energía eléctrica permite realizar muchas funciones  
útiles. Este producto se ha diseñado y fabricado para  
garantizar su seguridad personal. EL USO INADECUADO  
PUEDE RESULTAR EN PELIGROS DE DESCARGAS  
ELÉCTRICAS O INCENDIOS POTENCIALES. Con el fin  
de respetar las medidas de seguridad incorporadas en  
este producto, tenga en cuenta las siguientes reglas  
básicas de instalación, uso y servicio técnico.  
CABLE DE ENTRADA  
DE ANTENA  
1. Lectura de las instrucciones Todas las instrucciones de  
seguridad y uso deben leerse antes de utilizar el producto.  
2. Conservación de las instrucciones Las instrucciones  
de seguridad y uso deben guardarse para usarlas como  
referencia en el futuro.  
ABRAZADERA DE PUESTA  
A TIERRA  
UNIDAD DE DESCARGA  
DE ANTENA  
(ESTATUTO 810–20 DEL NEC)  
3. Advertencias Deben observarse todas las advertencias del  
EQUIPO DE  
CONDUCTORES DE PUESTA  
SERVICIO  
A TIERRA  
producto y de las instrucciones de uso.  
ELÉCTRICO  
(ESTATUTO 810–21 DEL NEC)  
4. Instrucciones Deben seguirse todas las instrucciones de  
uso.  
5. Limpieza Desenchufe este producto de la toma de  
alimentación antes de limpiarlo. No utilice limpiadores líquidos ni  
aerosoles. Utilice un paño húmedo.  
ABRAZADERAS DE PUESTA A TIERRA  
SISTEMA DE ELECTRODO DE  
PUESTA A TIERRA DEL SERVICIO  
DE ALIMENTACIÓN  
(PARTE 250. PARTE H DEL NEC)  
NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (CÓDIGO ELÉCTRICO NACIONAL)  
6. Aditamentos No utilice aditamentos no recomendados por  
el fabricante del producto, ya que pueden causar peligros.  
7. Agua y humedad No utilice este producto cerca del agua,  
por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera, cubeta de lavado, fregadero  
de cocina, en un sótano húmedo, ni cerca de una piscina, etc.  
8. Accesorios No coloque este producto sobre un carrito,  
soporte, trípode o mesa inestable. El producto podría caerse,  
causando heridas graves a niños o adultos y daños graves al  
propio producto. Utilícelo solamente con un carrito, soporte,  
trípode o mesa recomendado por el fabricante o vendido con el  
producto. Cualquier trabajo de montaje del producto deberá  
realizarse según las instrucciones del fabricante, y deberán  
utilizarse los accesorios de montaje recomendados por él.  
9. Transporte Mueva el producto con cuidado  
15. Relámpagos Como protección complementaria para este  
producto durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no lo utilice durante  
mucho tiempo, desenchúfelo de la toma mural y desconecte la  
antena o sistema de cables. De esta forma se evitará que el  
producto se dañe debido a relámpagos y sobretensiones.  
16. Lineas eléctricas Los sistemas de antenas exteriores no  
deben encontrarse cerca de líneas eléctricas aéreas o de otros  
circuitos de alimentación o de luz eléctrica, ni donde puedan  
caer sobre dichos circuitos o líneas. Cuando se instale un sistema  
de antena exterior, debe tenerse especial cuidado para evitar  
entrar en contacto con tales circuitos o líneas eléctricas, ya que  
tal contacto puede ser mortal.  
17. Sobrecarga No sobrecargue las tomas murales, los cables  
prolongadores ni los receptores integrales, ya que si lo hace  
pueden producirse incendios o descargas eléctricas.  
cuando se encuentre en un carrito. Las  
paradas bruscas, la fuerza excesiva o las  
superficies desniveladas pueden causar que  
18. Introducción de objetos sólidos y líquidos No  
introduzca nunca ningún tipo de objeto en este producto a través  
de las ranuras de la caja, ya que pueden entrar en contacto con  
puntos de tensión peligrosos o cortocircuitar componentes, lo  
que podría provocar incendios o descargas eléctricas. No  
derrame nunca ningún tipo de líquido sobre el producto.  
19. Servicio No intente reparar por sí mismo este producto, ya  
que al abrir o extraer las cubiertas puede quedar expuesto a  
tensión peligrosa y demás peligros. Solicite asistencia técnica a  
personal especializado.  
el producto y el carrito se caigan.  
10. Ventilación Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja se proporcionan  
para la ventilación del producto, para asegurar un funcionamiento  
fiable y para protegerlo contra el sobrecalentamiento, y a la misma  
vez, estas aberturas no deben bloquearse ni cubrirse. Con el fin  
de que las aberturas no queden bloqueadas, no coloque el  
producto sobre una cama, sofá, alfombra u otras superficies  
similares. Este producto no debe instalarse en un espacio cerrado,  
como un estante para libros, a menos que reciba una ventilación  
adecuada o que las instrucciones del fabricante hayan sido  
observadas.  
20. Averías que necesitan ser reparadas Desenchufe este  
producto de la toma mural y solicite asistencia técnica a personal  
especializado en las siguientes condiciones:  
11. Fuentes de alimentación Este producto debe utilizarse  
únicamente con el tipo de fuente de alimentación especificada  
en la etiqueta de características. Si no está seguro del tipo de  
suministro eléctrico existente en su hogar, consulte con el  
proveedor de producto o con la compañía eléctrica local. Con  
respecto al producto diseñado para utilizarse con pilas, o otras  
fuentes de suministro consulte el manual de instrucciones.  
12. Puesta a tierra o polarización Este producto dispone de  
un enchufe polarizado de dos cables (una cuchilla del enchufe  
es màs grande que la otra) o con un enchufe puesto a tierra de  
tres cables (un tercer conector para puesta a tierra). El enchufe  
polarizado de dos cables encaja en la toma de alimentación en  
una única posición solamente. El enchufe a tierra de tres cables  
se conecta solamente en un tomacorriente con descarga a tierra.  
Si el enchufe no encaja, solicite a un electricista la sustitución de  
la toma de alimentación obsoleta. No modifique el enchufe y  
respete esta medida de seguridad.  
a . Cuando el cable de alimentación o el enchufe esté dañado.  
b. Si se ha derramado líquido sobre o caído objetos dentro del producto.  
c . Si el producto ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua.  
d. Si el producto no funciona con normalidad al seguir las instrucciones  
del manual. Ajuste solamente los controles especificados en el  
manual de instrucciones, ya que el ajuste inadecuado de otros  
controles puede provocar daños que a menudo requieren un trabajo  
extenso por parte de un técnico especializado para que el producto  
recupere su funcionamiento normal.  
e . Si el producto se ha caído o se ha dañado de alguna manera.  
f . Cuando el producto exhiba un cambio evidente en su rendimiento  
21. Pieza(sesdtoeindriecacalamnebcieosidadCdueaansdisotesneciaanténcneiccae)s.arias piezas de  
sustitución, asegúrese de que el personal de servicio técnico ha  
utilizado las especificadas por el fabricante o que cuenten con  
las mismas características que las originales. Las sustituciones  
no autorizadas pueden provocar incendios, descargas eléctricas  
u otros peligros.  
22. Comprobación de seguridadDespués de haber finalizado  
cualquier servicio técnico o de reparación de este producto,  
solicite al técnico que realice comprobaciones de seguridad para  
determinar que el producto se encuentra en condiciones de  
funcionamiento.  
13. Protección del cable de la alimentación Los cables de  
la alimentación deben instalarse de forma que nadie pueda  
caminar sobre ellos ni queden atrapados por artículos colocados  
sobre o contra ellos, poniendo mucha atención a las partes donde  
los cables entran en contacto con las clavijas, a las tomas de  
corriente y a los puntos por donde salen del producto.  
23. Calor Este aparato deberá situarse alejado de fuentes de calor  
como, por ejemplo, radiadores, salidas de calor, estufas y otros  
aparatos que produzcan calor (incluyendo amplificadores).  
107  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p106-107.p65  
107  
03.1.14, 2:42 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
4
Conecte los enchufes de salida VIDEO/AUDIO  
en esta grabadora, a los enchufes de entrada  
VIDEO/AUDIO en suTV usando el cable de  
video/audio.  
Conexión básica  
La conexión siguiente es la conexión básica para ver o  
grabar programas de TV.  
TV  
Asegúrese de que los colores de los enchufes y  
clavijas coincidan cuando conecta el cable.  
Para los enchufes  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN 1  
Para los enchufes  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN 2  
5 Conecte los enchufes de salidaVIDEO/  
AUDIO en su VCR, a los enchufes de entrada  
VIDEO/AUDIO en suTV usando un cable de  
audio/video.  
Cable de  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
(Disponible  
Cable de  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
(incluido)  
Después de la conexión  
Conecte los cables de alimentación del TV y VCR. Luego  
vaya "EZ Set Up".  
3
Cable coaxial  
Para el enchufe de  
comercialmente)  
entrada de antena  
4
5
Para los enchufes  
de salida del  
(Disponible comercialmente)  
Para el enchufe de  
salida de antena  
VCR  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
EZ Set Up  
IMPORTANTE (Precaución durante EZ Set Up):  
• No pulse el botón POWER de la grabadora ni del  
control remoto.  
Para el enchufe de  
entrada de antena  
Cable coaxial  
(incluido)  
2
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
Pala el enchufe  
OUT TO TV  
REC  
Para el enchufe  
IN FROM  
DISC  
STANDBY  
TIMER  
La grabadora  
DISC IN  
AV  
TIMER AUTO REC  
ANTENNA  
IN FROM  
POWER  
ANTENNA  
LINE  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
VHF/UHF/CATV  
OUT TO TV  
I
PB  
PR  
La función de EZ Set Up ajusta automáticamente los canales  
del sintonizador cuando el cable de la antena está conectado  
al panel trasero de la grabadora y la clavija del cable de  
alimentación está conectada a una toma de CA.  
Para los enchufes  
de salida del  
VIDEO/AUDIO  
Cable de antena 1  
1 Asegúrese de que el cable de la antena esté  
conectado. Para conocer la configuración de  
la conexión, consulte Conexión básica.  
A la salida de pared de  
antena/cable TV.  
2 Conecte el enchufe de alimentación de la  
1 Conecte el cable de antena deTV al enchufe  
IN FROM ANTENNA en la parte trasera de  
esta grabadora.  
grabadora un tomacorriente de CA.  
3 Los canales del sintonizador se ajustarán  
automáticamente.  
2 Conecte el enchufe OUTTO TV en la parte  
trasera de esta grabadora, al enchufe de  
entrada de antena en su VCR usando el  
cable coaxial.  
• Esta grabadora puede controlar y utilizar señales  
horarias (señales EDS), emitidas por algunos  
canales de televisión, para poner automáticamente  
en hora el reloj.  
NOTA  
NOTA  
• Si conecta esta grabadora directamente a su TV, omita el  
paso siguiente.  
• Si la alimentación se suministra a la grabadora antes de  
que el cable se encuentre conectado, EZ Setup Up no  
podrá preajustar los canales en la memoria. Si esto llega  
a suceder, preajuste RESET en la parte delantera de la  
grabadora. La función EZ Set Up volverá a funcionar  
nuevamente.  
• Si se conecta la alimentación durante EZ Set Up, el  
ajuste automático de los canales se interrumpirá y los  
canales del sintonizador no podrán ser preajustados.  
• La Puesta en Hora Automática del Reloj puede tardar  
varios minutos.  
• La señal de entrada para la toma IN FROM ANTENNA  
pasa completamente hacia el enchufe OUT TO TV.  
3 Conecte el enchufe de salida de antena en  
su VCR al enchufe de entrada de antena en  
su TV, usando el cable coaxial.  
108  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p108.p65  
108  
03.1.14, 2:43 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
Reproducción de DVD  
Avance rápido/Retroceso rápido  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
Reproduce solamente los  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
AUDIO CD  
discos para reproducción  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
DVD VIDEO  
Pulse FWD  
o
REV durante la  
TITLE  
reproducción.  
SET/  
1 Encienda elTV y cambie el canal  
de TV para “VIDEOexterno o  
canal “AV que esta conectado a  
los enchufes de salida deVIDEO/  
AUDIO.  
RETURN  
ENTER  
El disco comienza una exploración  
rápida a una velocidad 2x (1).  
Selección de velocidad de exploración  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
1
DVD  
REC MODE  
La imagen de exploración rápida  
aparece aquí (Para los CD de audio no  
se muestra ninguna imagen.)  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
2 Pulse POWER. La grabadora se  
100  
REV  
FWD  
enciende.  
PLAY  
• Para los DVD se disponen de tres  
velocidades y dos para los CD. Cada  
3 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para abrir la  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
bandeja de discos.  
STOP  
vez que se presiona FWD  
o
REV,  
4 Coloque el disco en la bandeja de  
la velocidad de exploración rápida  
cambia en la secuencia siguiente:  
(DVD)  
SKIP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
discos.  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
• Colóquelo con el lado del título  
impreso orientado hacia arriba, y  
alinéelo con las guías.  
• Cuando cargue un disco de dos  
caras, colóquelo con el lado que Ud.  
desee reproducir orientado hacia  
abajo.  
1 (alrededor de ×2)  
2 (alrededor de ×8)  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
3 (alrededor de ×32)  
(CD de video y CD de audio)  
TV CONTROL  
1 (alrededor de ×2)  
2 (alrededor de ×8)  
Función de avance rápido/  
retroceso rápido (búsqueda)  
sobre la grabadora  
Pulse y mantenga SKIP  
/
durante más de 2 segundos sobre la  
parte delantera de la grabadora.  
5 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar  
la bandeja de discos.  
La velocidad de búsqueda es 2  
(alrededor de x8).  
• Cuando el disco está siendo  
identificado (se visualiza "LOAD" en la  
visualización del panel delantero), el  
indicador DISC IN sobre el panel  
delantero destella. El indicador se  
ilumina cuando el disco termina de  
ser identificado ("LOAD"  
desaparece).  
• Algunos discos inician la  
reproducción automáticamente.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
TIMER ON/OFF  
POWER  
REC  
DISC  
STANDBY  
TIMER  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)-AUDIO-R  
LINE IN  
2
SKIP  
STILL/PAUSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
RESET  
AV  
DISC IN  
TIMER AUTO REC  
SKIP  
/
NOTAS  
En algunos casos, la función de exploración  
rápida se encuentra inhabilitada.  
En algunos discos DVD y CD de video, el audio  
y subtítulos no son reproducidos durante la  
reproducción de exploración rápida.  
Con un disco DVD, no puede buscar pasando  
un título. La reproducción se inicia desde el  
inicio del título.  
6 Pulse |PLAY para iniciar la  
reproducción.  
• Si está reproduciendo un disco DVD-  
VIDEO, puede aparecer un menú.  
Durante la reproducción con exploración rápida,  
el sonido puede no generarse.  
7 Pulse ISTOP para detener la  
Cuando la función de búsqueda en avance  
rápido es usada durante la reproducción de un  
disco de video DVD, la velocidad puede diferir  
de la que se describe en el manual,  
dependiendo en el disco y en la escena que se  
está reproduciendo.  
reproducción.  
109  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p109-110.p65  
109  
03.1.14, 2:43 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guía de operación rápida en español  
Omisión (Avance/Retroceso)  
Avance de cuadro  
Imagen fija/pausa  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
CH  
AUDIO CD  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
Mientras está reproduciendo un disco, esta  
función salta al inicio del capítulo/pista  
siguiente (Avance), o al capítulo/pista actual  
(Retroceso), y automáticamente inicia la  
reproducción de ese capítulo/pista.  
TITLE  
1 Pulse STILL/PAUSE durante la  
reproducción.  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
La reproducción es de imagen fija.  
La reproducción es pausada cuando  
se reproduce un CD de audio.  
+
VCR PLUS  
TIMER PROG.  
Pulse SKIP  
reproducción.  
o
SKIP durante la  
REC MODE  
2 Pulse F.ADV  
o
F.ADV.  
El disco avanza de un cuadro a la  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
La reproducción omite en avance un  
capítulo/pista por cada vez que se  
presiona SKIP  
Si presiona  
reproducción, y entonces presiona  
SKIP nuevamente dentro de los  
5 segundos, la reproducción retorna  
al inicio del capítulo/pista previo.  
100  
vez cada vez que presiona F.ADV  
El disco retrocede en un cuadro cada  
vez que presiona F.ADV.  
Si presiona y mantiene SKIP  
durante más de 2 segundos en la  
parte delantera de la grabadora, se  
inicia la búsqueda.  
.
REV  
FWD  
.
PLAY  
SKIP y se inicia la  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
SLOW  
STOP  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
EDIT  
3 Pulse |PLAY para retornar a la  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
NOTA  
reproducción normal.  
TV CONTROL  
En algunos discos, las funciones de  
omisión se encuentran inhabilitadas.  
NOTAS  
En algunos discos, las funciones de  
imagen fija/pausa y avance de cuadro se  
encuentran inhabilitadas.  
Las funciones de reproducción de avance  
de cuadro se encuentran inhabilitadas  
para los CD de audio.  
Las funciones de reproducción de  
retroceso de cuadro se encuentran  
inhabilitadas para los CD de video.  
La calidad de imagen puede disminuir  
durante el avance o retroceso de cuadro,  
con un disco que no sea un disco de modo  
DVD-R VR (tal como un disco de video  
DVD).  
Cámara lenta  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD R  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
1 Pulse SLOW durante la  
reproducción.  
Se disponen de tres velocidades. Cada  
vez que se presiona SLOW, la  
velocidad de la reproducción en  
cámara lenta cambia en la secuencia  
siguiente:  
1 (alrededor de ×1/2)  
2 (alrededor de ×1/8)  
3 (alrededor de ×1/16)  
2 Pulse |PLAY para retornar a la  
reproducción normal.  
NOTA  
En algunos discos, las funciones de  
reproducción en cámara lenta se  
encuentran inhabilitadas.  
110  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p109-110.p65  
110  
03.1.14, 2:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a “OPR. 2”. Presione de nuevo  
para iniciar la grabación.  
                                                                                                     
ÆREC  
                                                                                                     
Guía de operación rápida en español  
• Cada vez que se presiona REC MODE,  
el modo cambia de la manera  
siguiente:  
Grabación básica  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
TIMER  
DISC  
TIMER  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DVD RW DVD RW  
DVD R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
CH  
ANGLE AUDIO  
SETUP/  
Modo VR:  
1 Encienda elTV y cambie el canal  
de TV a "VIDEO" externo o canal  
"AV" conectado a las enchufes de  
salida de VIDEO/AUDIO.  
DNR  
ZOOM INPUT  
MENU  
FUNCTION  
FINE SP LP EP  
TITLE  
SET/  
RETURN  
ENTER  
Modo Video:  
+
VCR PLUS  
FINE SP LP  
2 Pulse POWER. La grabadora se  
TIMER PROG.  
encendida.  
REC MODE  
8 Pulse ÆREC.  
3 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para abrir la  
AM/PM  
ERASE PROGRAM  
bandeja de discos.  
DVD-RW:  
100  
La grabación se inicia inmediatamente.  
• El indicador de grabación sobre la  
visualización del panel delantero se  
ilumina.  
REV  
FWD  
4 Coloque el disco en la bandeja de  
PLAY  
discos.  
Tome del disco sin tocar ninguna de  
sus superficies, ubicando con el lado  
del título impreso hacia arriba.  
REC  
STILL/PAUSE  
STOP  
DVD-R:  
SKIP  
SEARCH  
F.ADV  
SKIP  
SLOW  
EDIT  
La grabadora se prepara para iniciar la  
grabación cuando se ajusta “GRAB  
DVD-R” en “PROG. PARA GRABACIÓN”  
ON  
ORIGINAL/  
PLAY LIST  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
POWER INPUT  
VOL  
CH  
TV CONTROL  
• La grabación continúa hasta que  
presiona ISTOP o el disco se llena.  
• Si prefiere una grabación DVD-R para  
trabajar de la misma manera que la  
grabación a DVD-RW, ajuste “GRAB  
DVD-R” en “PROG. PARA  
5 Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar  
la bandeja de discos.  
• Cuando el disco está siendo  
identificado (se visualiza "LOAD" en la  
visualización del panel delantero), el  
indicador DISC IN sobre el panel  
delantero destella. El indicador se  
ilumina cuando el disco termina de  
ser identificado ("LOAD"  
GRABACIÓN” a “OPR. 1”.  
desaparece).  
• Si coloca un disco completamente en  
blanco, la grabadora toma un corto  
tiempo mientras inicializa el disco  
(toma alrededor de 60 a 90  
segundos).  
6 Pulse CH ' / " para seleccionar  
el canal deTV a grabar.  
• Compruebe si el canal está ajustado  
al canal que desea grabar sobre la  
pantalla de TV.  
7 Pulse REC MODE para  
seleccionar el modo de  
grabación.  
• El modo actual se visualiza sobre la  
visualización del panel delantero.  
111  
DV_RW2UQ(S)#p111.p65  
111  
03.1.14, 2:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY  
(Valid for warranty service in the U.S. only)  
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION warrants to the first consumer purchaser that this Sharp brand product (the  
“Product”), when shipped in its original container, will be free from defective workmanship and materials, and agrees  
that it will, at its option, either repair the defect or replace the defective Product or part thereof with a new or  
remanufactured equivalent at no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor for the period(s) set forth below.  
This warranty does not apply to any appearance items of the Product nor to the additional excluded item(s) set forth  
below nor to any Product the exterior of which has been damaged or defaced, which has been subjected to improper  
voltage or other misuse, abnormal service or handling, or which has been altered or modified in design or  
construction.  
In order to enforce the rights under this limited warranty, the purchaser should follow the steps set forth below and  
provide proof of purchase to the servicer.  
The limited warranty described herein is in addition to whatever implied warranties may be granted to purchasers by  
law. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE  
ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD(S) FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE SET FORTH BELOW. Some states do not allow  
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.  
Neither the sales personnel of the seller nor any other person is authorized to make any warranties other than those  
described herein, or to extend the duration of any warranties beyond the time period described herein on behalf of  
Sharp.  
The warranties described herein shall be the sole and exclusive warranties granted by Sharp and shall be the sole  
and exclusive remedy available to the purchaser. Correction of defects, in the manner and for the period of time  
described herein, shall constitute complete fulfillment of all liabilities and responsibilities of Sharp to the purchaser  
with respect to the Product, and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims, whether based on contract, negligence,  
strict liability or otherwise. In no event shall Sharp be liable, or in any way responsible, for any damages or defects in  
the Product which were caused by repairs or attempted repairs performed by anyone other than an authorized  
servicer. Nor shall Sharp be liable or in any way responsible for any incidental or consequential economic or property  
damage. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may  
not apply to you.  
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY  
FROM STATE TO STATE.  
Model Specific Section  
Your Product Model Number & Description:  
DV-RW2U DVD RECORDER  
(Be sure to have this information available when you need service  
for your Product.)  
Warranty Period for this Product:  
One (1) year parts and ninety (90) days labor from date of purchase.  
Non-rechargeable batteries.  
Additional Item(s) Excluded from  
Warranty Coverage (if any):  
Where to Obtain Service:  
From a Sharp Authorized Servicer located in the United States. To  
find the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Servicer, call Sharp  
toll free at 1-800-BE-SHARP.  
What to do to Obtain Service:  
Ship prepaid or carry in your Product to a Sharp Authorized Servicer.  
Be sure to have Proof of Purchase available. If you ship the Prod-  
uct, be sure it is insured and packaged securely.  
TO OBTAIN SUPPLY, ACCESSORY OR PRODUCT INFORMATION, GO TO OUR WEBSITE AT www.sharp-usa.com  
OR CALL 1-800-BE-SHARP.  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION  
Printed in Malaysia  
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135  
Impreso en Malasia  
TINS-A555WJZZ  
03P01-MSM  
SHARP CORPORATION  
Osaka, Japan  
DV_RW2U#Hyo1-4.p65  
1
03.1.9, 8:37 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Air Cleaner FZ A60HFU User Manual
Sony Computer Monitor HMD A200L User Manual
Sony Portable CD Player D CJ01 User Manual
Sony TV Video Accessories LFA C1 User Manual
Sunbeam Blender SM8900 User Manual
Sunbeam Hot Beverage Maker KE6400 User Manual
SUPER MICRO Computer Server 2042G 6RF User Manual
Swann Security Camera SW344DWD User Manual
Sybase Server DC38029 01 0500 01 User Manual
Tanaka Chainsaw ECS 3301 B User Manual